Communication device

ABSTRACT

The mobile phone comprising a mobile phone updating implementor which updates battery controller, CCD unit controller, microphone controller, speaker controller, or vibrator controller by utilizing the mobile phone updating data received via antenna.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 12/344,306, filedDec. 26, 2008, which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 10/905,836,filed Jan. 22, 2005, which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No.10/711,265, filed Sep. 7, 2004, which claims the benefit of U.S.Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/481,695, filed Nov. 22, 2003, all ofwhich are hereby incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

BACKGROUND OF INVENTION

The invention relates to communication device and more particularly tothe communication device which is capable to communicate with anothercommunication device in a wireless fashion.

U.S. Patent Publication No. 20030013483 is introduced as prior art ofthe present invention of which the summary is the following: “A userinterface includes a main screen segregated into various screen areas.At least one of the screen areas is devoted to a system application fordisplaying status icons, and another of the screen areas is devoted toan interface page which may or may not link to other interface pageswhich are used for displaying current or recent application informationfor respective user applications, which user applications may beaccessed through interaction with the interface page. The applicationinformation may be application status information, recent communicationmessages (such as e-mail messages, SMS messages, or instant messagingmessages) and/or one or more upcoming events or to do items for a user.The user interaction may occur through selection with a pointing devicesuch as a stylus, a fingertip stylus, a finger, or one or more buttons,or even through voice commands. The user interface may also include anarea reserved for displaying advertisements.” However, this prior artdoes not disclose the mobile phone comprising a mobile phone updatingimplementor which updates battery controller, CCD unit controller,microphone controller, speaker controller, or vibrator controller byutilizing the mobile phone updating data received via antenna.

For the avoidance of doubt, the number of the prior arts introducedherein (and/or in IDS) may be of a large one, however, applicant has nointent to hide the more relevant prior art(s) in the less relevant ones.

SUMMARY OF INVENTION

It is an object of the present invention to provide a device capable toimplement a plurality of functions.

It is another object of the present invention to provide merchandise tomerchants attractive to the customers in the U.S.

It is another object of the present invention to provide mobility to theusers of communication device.

It is another object of the present invention to provide moreconvenience to the customers in the U.S.

It is another object of the present invention to provide moreconvenience to the users of communication device or any tangible thingin which the communication device is fixedly or detachably (i.e.,removably) installed.

It is another object of the present invention to overcome theshortcomings associated with the foregoing prior art.

The present invention introduces the mobile phone comprising a mobilephone updating implementor which updates battery controller, CCD unitcontroller, microphone controller, speaker controller, or vibratorcontroller by utilizing the mobile phone updating data received viaantenna.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

The above and other aspects, features, and advantages of the inventionwill be better understood by reading the following more particulardescription of the invention, presented in conjunction with thefollowing drawing, wherein:

FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary embodiment of thepresent invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Paragraph [0020]—The following description is of the best presentlycontemplated mode of carrying out the present invention. Thisdescription is not to be taken in a limiting sense but is made merelyfor the purpose of describing the general principles of the invention.For example, each description of random access memory in thisspecification illustrate(s) only one function or mode in order to avoidcomplexity in its explanation, however, such description does not meanthat only one function or mode can be implemented at a time. In otherwords, more than one function or mode can be implemented simultaneouslyby way of utilizing the same random access memory. In addition, thefigure number is cited after the elements in parenthesis in a manner forexample ‘RAM 206 (FIG. 1)’. It is done so merely to assist the readersto have a better understanding of this specification, and must not beused to limit the scope of the claims in any manner since the figurenumbers cited are not exclusive. There are only few data stored in eachstorage area described in this specification. This is done so merely tosimplify the explanation and, thereby, to enable the reader of thisspecification to understand the content of each function with lessconfusion. Therefore, more than few data (hundreds and thousands ofdata, if necessary) of the same kind, not to mention, are preferred tobe stored in each storage area to fully implement each functiondescribed herein. The scope of the invention should be determined byreferencing the appended claims.

Paragraph [0021]—FIG. 1 is a simplified block diagram of theCommunication Device 200 utilized in the present invention. Referring toFIG. 1, Communication Device 200 includes CPU 211 which controls andadministers the overall function and operation of Communication Device200. CPU 211 uses RAM 206 to temporarily store data and/or to performcalculation to perform its function, and to implement the presentinvention, modes, functions, and systems explained hereinafter. VideoProcessor 202 generates analog and/or digital video signals which aredisplayed on LCD 201. ROM 207 stores the data and programs which areessential to operate Communication Device 200. Wireless signals arereceived by Antenna 218 and processed by Signal Processor 208. Inputsignals are input by Input Device 210, such as a dial pad, a joystick,and/or a keypad, and the signals are transferred via Input Interface 209and Data Bus 203 to CPU 211. Indicator 212 is an LED lamp which isdesigned to output different colors (e.g., red, blue, green, etc).Analog audio data is input to Microphone 215. A/D 213 converts theanalog audio data into a digital format. Speaker 216 outputs analogaudio data which is converted into an analog format from digital formatby D/A 204. Sound Processor 205 produces digital audio signals that aretransferred to D/A 204 and also processes the digital audio signalstransferred from A/D 213. CCD Unit 214 captures video image which isstored in RAM 206 in a digital format. Vibrator 217 vibrates the entiredevice by the command from CPU 211.

Paragraph [0022]—As another embodiment, LCD 201 or LCD 201/VideoProcessor 202 may be separated from the other elements described in FIG.1, and be connected in a wireless fashion to be wearable and/orhead-mountable.

Paragraph [0023]—When Communication Device 200 is in the voicecommunication mode, the analog audio data input to Microphone 215 isconverted to a digital format by A/D 213 and transmitted to anotherdevice via Antenna 218 in a wireless fashion after being processed bySignal Processor 208, and the wireless signal representing audio datawhich is received via Antenna 218 is output from Speaker 216 after beingprocessed by Signal Processor 208 and converted to analog signal by D/A204. For the avoidance of doubt, the definition of Communication Device200 in this specification includes so-called ‘PDA’. The definition ofCommunication Device 200 also includes in this specification any devicewhich is mobile and/or portable and which is capable to send and/orreceive audio data, text data, image data, video data, and/or othertypes of data in a wireless fashion via Antenna 218. The definition ofCommunication Device 200 further includes any micro device embedded orinstalled into devices and equipments (e.g., VCR, TV, tape recorder,heater, air conditioner, fan, clock, micro wave oven, dish washer,refrigerator, oven, washing machine, dryer, door, window, automobile,motorcycle, and modem) to remotely control these devices and equipments.The size of Communication Device 200 is irrelevant. Communication Device200 may be installed in houses, buildings, bridges, boats, ships,submarines, airplanes, and spaceships, and firmly fixed therein.

Paragraph [0024]—This Paragraph [0024] illustrate(s) the elements ofCommunication Device 200. The elements of Communication Device 200described in this Paragraph [0024] is identical to the ones described inFIG. 1, except Communication Device 200 has new element, i.e., LED 219.Here, LED 219 receives infra red signals from other wireless devices,which are transferred to CPU 211 via Data Bus 203. LED 219 also sendsinfra red signals in a wireless fashion which are composed by CPU 211and transferred via Data Bus 203. As the second embodiment, LED 219 maybe connected to Signal Processor 208. Here, LED 219 transfers thereceived infra red signals to Signal Processor 208, and Signal Processor208 processes and converts the signals to a CPU readable format whichare transferred to CPU 211 via Data Bus 203. The data produced by CPU211 are processed by Signal Processor 208 and transferred to anotherdevice via LED 219 in a wireless fashion. The task of LED 219 is as sameas that of Antenna 218 described in FIG. 1 except that LED 219 utilizesinfra red signals for implementing wireless communication in the secondembodiment. For the avoidance of doubt, the reference to FIG. 1 (e.g.,referring to FIG. 1 in parenthesis) automatically refers to thisParagraph [0024] in this specification.

Paragraph [0025]—This Paragraph [0025] illustrate(s) the data stored inHost H. In the present embodiment, Host H includes Host InformationStorage Area H00a which stores various types of data to assist and/orco-operate with Communication Device 200 to implement all modes,functions, and systems described in this specification. As anotherembodiment, Host H may be composed of a plurality of computers, i.e.,one master computer and a plurality of slave computers, wherein themaster computer is connected to the plurality of slave computers. Asanother embodiment, Host H may also be composed of a plurality of mastercomputers by way of utilizing peer-to-peer connection.

Paragraph [0026]—<<Multiple Language Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0027]—Paragraph [0028] through Paragraph [0076] illustratethe multiple language displaying function wherein a language is selectedfrom a plurality of languages, such as English, Japanese, French, andGerman, which is utilized to operate Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0028]—This Paragraph [0028] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment, RAM 206includes Multiple Language Displaying Info Storage Area 20654a of whichthe data and the software programs stored therein are described inParagraph [0030].

Paragraph [0029]—The data and/or the software programs stored inMultiple Language Displaying Info Storage Area 20654a (Paragraph [0028])may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0030]—This Paragraph [0030] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Multiple Language Displaying Info Storage Area 20654a(Paragraph [0028]). In the present embodiment, Multiple LanguageDisplaying Info Storage Area 20654a includes Multiple LanguageDisplaying Data Storage Area 20654b and Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654c. Multiple Language Displaying Data StorageArea 20654b stores the data necessary to implement the present function,such as the ones described in Paragraph [0031] through Paragraph [0039].Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c stores thesoftware programs necessary to implement the present function, such asthe ones described in Paragraph [0040].

Paragraph [0031]—This Paragraph [0031] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Multiple Language Displaying Data Storage Area 20654b(Paragraph [0030]). In the present embodiment, Multiple LanguageDisplaying Data Storage Area 20654b includes Language Tables StorageArea 20654b1, Language Type Data Storage Area 20654b2, Language ItemData Storage Area 20654b3, and Selected Language Table ID Storage Area20654b4. Language Tables Storage Area 20654b1 stores the data describedin Paragraph [0032]. Language Type Data Storage Area 20654b2 stores thedata described in Paragraph [0038]. Language Item Data Storage Area20654b3 stores the data described in Paragraph [0039]. Selected LanguageTable ID Storage Area 20654b4 stores the language table ID selected inS4s of Paragraph [0042], Paragraph [0051], Paragraph [0060], andParagraph [0069].

Paragraph [0032]—This Paragraph [0032] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Language Tables Storage Area 20654b1 (Paragraph [0031]). Inthe present embodiment, Language Tables Storage Area 20654b1 includesLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a, Language Table#2 Storage Area20654b1b, Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c, and Language Table#4Storage Area 20654b1d. Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a stores thedata described in Paragraph [0033]. Language Table#2 Storage Area20654b1b stores the data described in Paragraph [0035]. Language Table#3Storage Area 20654b1c stores the data described in Paragraph [0036].Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654b1d stores the data described inParagraph [0037].

Paragraph [0033]—This Paragraph [0033] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0032]). In thepresent embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Text Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language textdata.

Paragraph [0034]—Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language textdata, and each language text data represents the English text datadisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment, LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654b1a stores the following data: the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#1’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Openfile’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Close file’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’and the corresponding language text data ‘Delete’; the language item ID‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Copy’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Cut’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#6’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Paste’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘Insert’; the language item ID‘Language Item#8’ and the corresponding language text data ‘File’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Edit’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘View’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#11’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Format’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#12’ and the corresponding language text data‘Tools’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Window’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘Help’; the language item ID‘Language Item#15’ and the corresponding language text data ‘MyNetwork’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Trash’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘Local Disk’; the language item ID‘Language Item#18’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Save’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#19’ and the corresponding language textdata ‘Yes’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ and thecorresponding language text data No; and the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#21’ and the corresponding language text data ‘Cancel’.

Paragraph [0035]—This Paragraph [0035] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0032]). In thepresent embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1b comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Text Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language textdata. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language text data, andeach language text data represents the Japanese text data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment, Language Table#1 StorageArea 20654b1b stores the following data: the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#1’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Open file’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Close file’ in Japanese; the language itemID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language text data meaning‘Delete’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#4’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Copy’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Cut’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#6’and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Paste’ in Japanese;the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding languagetext data meaning ‘Insert’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#8’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘File’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Edit’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language text data meaning‘View’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Format’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning Tools' in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Window’ in Japanese;the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the corresponding languagetext data meaning ‘Help’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#15’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘My Network’in Japanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Trash’ in Japanese; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language textdata meaning ‘Local Disk’ in Japanese; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#18’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘Save’ inJapanese; the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ and the correspondinglanguage text data meaning ‘Yes’ in Japanese; the language item ID‘Language Item#20’ and the corresponding language text data meaning ‘No’in Japanese; and the language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and thecorresponding language text data meaning ‘Cancel’ in Japanese.

Paragraph [0036]—This Paragraph [0036] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph [0032]). In thepresent embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1c comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Text Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language textdata. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language text data, andeach language text data represents the French text data displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area20654b1c stores the following data: the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#1’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#1’ meaning‘Open file’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#2’ meaning ‘Close file’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#3’ meaning ‘Delete’ in French; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#4’ meaning ‘Copy’ in French; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#5’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#5’ meaning‘Cut’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#6’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#6’ meaning ‘Paste’ in French;the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French#7’ meaning ‘Insert’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#8’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#8’meaning ‘File’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#9’ meaning ‘Edit’ in French;the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French#10’ meaning ‘View’ in French; the language item ID‘Language Item#11’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#11’meaning ‘Format’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘French#12’ meaning ‘Tools’ inFrench; the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#13’ meaning ‘Window’ in French; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#14’ meaning ‘Help’ in French; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#15’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#15’ meaning‘My Network’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#16’ meaning ‘Trash’ in French;the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French#17’ meaning ‘Local Disk’ in French; the language itemID ‘Language Item#18’ and the corresponding language text data‘French#18’ meaning ‘Save’ in French; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#19’ and the corresponding language text data ‘French#19’ meaning‘Yes’ in French; the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘French#20’ meaning ‘No’ in French; andthe language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘French#21’ meaning ‘Cancel’ in French.

Paragraph [0037]—This Paragraph [0037] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph [0032]). In thepresent embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1d comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Text Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language textdata. Column ‘Language Text Data’ stores the language text data, andeach language text data represents the German text data displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment, Language Table#1 Storage Area20654b1d stores the following data: the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#1’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#1’ meaning‘Open file’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#2’ meaning ‘Close file’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item#3’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#3’ meaning ‘Delete’ in German; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#4’ meaning ‘Copy’ in German; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#5’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#5’ meaning‘Cut’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#6’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#6’ meaning ‘Paste’ in German;the language item ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German#7’ meaning ‘Insert’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#8’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#8’meaning ‘File’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#9’ meaning ‘Edit’ in German;the language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German#10’ meaning ‘View’ in German; the language item ID‘Language Item#11’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#11’meaning ‘Format’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ andthe corresponding language text data ‘German#12’ meaning ‘Tools’ inGerman; the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ and the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#13’ meaning ‘Window’ in German; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#14’ meaning ‘Help’ in German; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#15’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#15’ meaning‘My Network’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#16’ meaning ‘Trash’ in German;the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German#17’ meaning ‘Local Disk’ in German; the language itemID ‘Language Item#18’ and the corresponding language text data‘German#18’ meaning ‘Save’ in German; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#19’ and the corresponding language text data ‘German#19’ meaning‘Yes’ in German; the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ and thecorresponding language text data ‘German#20’ meaning ‘No’ in German; andthe language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding languagetext data ‘German#21’ meaning ‘Cancel’ in German.

Paragraph [0038]—This Paragraph [0038] illustrates data stored inLanguage Type Data Storage Area 20654b2 (Paragraph [0031]). In thepresent embodiment, Language Type Data Storage Area 20654b2 comprisestwo columns, i.e., ‘Language Table ID’ and ‘Language Type Data’. Column‘Language Table ID’ stores the language table ID, and each languagetable ID represents the identification of the storage areas included inLanguage Tables Storage Area 20654b1 (Paragraph [0032]). Column‘Language Type Data’ stores the language type data, and each languagetype data represents the type of the language utilized in the languagetable of the corresponding language table ID. In the present embodiment,Language Type Data Storage Area 20654b2 stores the following data: thelanguage table ID ‘Language Table#1’ and the corresponding language typedata ‘English’; the language table ID ‘Language Table#2’ and thecorresponding language type data ‘Japanese’; the language table ID‘Language Table#3’ and the corresponding language type data ‘French’;and the language table ID ‘Language Table#4’ and the correspondinglanguage type data ‘German’. Here, the language table ID ‘LanguageTable#1’ is an identification of Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a(Paragraph [0033]); the language table ID ‘Language Table#2’ is anidentification of Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph[0035]); the language table ID ‘Language Table#3’ is an identificationof Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph [0036]); and thelanguage table ID ‘Language Table#4’ is an identification of LanguageTable#4 Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph [0037]).

Paragraph [0039]—This Paragraph [0039] illustrates the data stored inLanguage Item Data Storage Area 20654b3 (Paragraph [0031]). In thepresent embodiment, Language Item Data Storage Area 20654b3 comprisestwo columns, i.e., ‘Language Item ID’ and ‘Language Item Data’. Column‘Language Item ID’ stores the language item IDs, and each language itemID represents the identification of the corresponding language itemdata. Column ‘Language Item Data’ stores the language item data, andeach language item data represents the content and/or the meaning of thelanguage text data displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1). In the presentembodiment, Language Item Data Storage Area 20654b3 stores the followingdata: the language item ID ‘Language Item#1’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘Open file’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#2’and the corresponding language item data ‘Close file’; the language itemID ‘Language Item#3’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Delete’;the language item ID ‘Language Item#4’ and the corresponding languageitem data ‘Copy’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#5’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Cut’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#6’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Paste’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#7’ and the corresponding language item data‘Insert’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘File’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ andthe corresponding language item data ‘Edit’; the language item ID‘Language Item#10’ and the corresponding language item data ‘View’; thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#11’ and the corresponding language itemdata ‘Format’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ and thecorresponding language item data ‘Tools’; the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#13’ and the corresponding language item data ‘Window’; the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#14’ and the corresponding language item data‘Help’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#15’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘My Network’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’and the corresponding language item data ‘Trash’; the language item ID‘Language Item#17’ and the corresponding language item data ‘LocalDisk’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#18’ and the correspondinglanguage item data ‘Save’; the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ andthe corresponding language item data ‘Yes’; the language item ID‘Language Item#20’ and the corresponding language item data ‘No’; andthe language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ and the corresponding languageitem data ‘Cancel’. Primarily, the data stored in column ‘Language ItemData’ are same as the ones stored in column ‘Language Text Data’ ofLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0033]).

Paragraph [0040]—This Paragraph [0040] illustrates the software programstored in Multiple Language Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c(Paragraph [0030]). In the present embodiment, Multiple LanguageDisplaying Software Storage Area 20654c stores Language SelectingSoftware 20654c1, Selected Language Displaying Software 20654c2,Language Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a,Language Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b, andLanguage Text Data Displaying Software For Explorer 20654c4. LanguageSelecting Software 20654c1 is the software program described inParagraph [0042], Paragraph [0051], Paragraph [0060], and Paragraph[0069]. Selected Language Displaying Software 20654c2 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0043], Paragraph [0052], Paragraph[0061], and Paragraph [0070]. Language Text Data Displaying Software ForWord Processor 20654c3a is the software program described in Paragraph[0044], Paragraph [0053], Paragraph [0062], and Paragraph [0071].Language Text Data Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b isthe software program described in Paragraph [0046], Paragraph [0055],Paragraph [0064], and Paragraph [0073]. Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654c4 is the software program described inParagraph [0048], Paragraph [0057], Paragraph [0066], and Paragraph[0075].

Paragraph [0041]—<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—UtilizingEnglish>>

Paragraph [0042]—This Paragraph [0042] illustrates Language SelectingSoftware 20654c1 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software StorageArea 20654c (Paragraph [0040]) which selects the language utilized tooperate Communication Device 200 from a plurality of languages. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves the language type data from Language Type Data Storage Area20654b2 (Paragraph [0038]) (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘English’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654b2 (Paragraph [0038]), and stores the language table ID(Language Table#1) in Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654b4(Paragraph [0031]) (S4).

Paragraph [0043]—This Paragraph [0043] illustrates Selected LanguageDisplaying Software 20654c2 stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040]) which displays andoperates with the language selected in S3 of Paragraph [0042] (i.e.,English). In the present embodiment, when Communication Device 200 ispowered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesthe selected language table ID (Language Table#1) from Selected LanguageTable ID Storage Area 20654b4 (Paragraph [0031]) (S2). CPU 211 thenidentifies the storage area corresponding to the language table IDselected in S2 (Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph[0033])) in Language Tables Storage Area 20654b1 (Paragraph [0032])(S3). Language text data displaying process is initiated thereafter ofwhich the details are described hereinafter (S4).

Paragraph [0044]—This Paragraph [0044] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040])which displays the language text data at the time a word processor, suchas MS Word and WordPerfect is executed. In the present embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes a word processor inresponse to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to activate and execute the word processor (S1). In theprocess of displaying the word processor on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S8 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0033]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘File’ at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#9’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0033]) anddisplays the corresponding language text data ‘Edit’ at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#10’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area20654b1a (Paragraph [0033]) and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘View’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S4).CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0033]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Format’ at the predetermined locationin the word processor (S5). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#12’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph[0033]) and displays the corresponding language text data ‘Tools’ at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S6). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area20654b1a (Paragraph [0033]) and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘Window’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S7).CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0033]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘Help’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S8). Alphanumeric data is input to the wordprocessor by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system thereafter (S9).

Paragraph [0045]—This Paragraph [0045] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a (Paragraph [0044])is implemented. In the present embodiment, the word processor describedin Paragraph [0044] is primarily composed of Menu Bar 20154MB andAlphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA wherein the language text datadescribed in S2 through S8 of Paragraph [0044] are displayed on Menu Bar20154MB and alphanumeric data are input in Alphanumeric Data Input Area20154ADIA. In the present embodiment, 20154MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBE is the language textdata processed in S3 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBV is the languagetext data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is thelanguage text data processed in S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBTis the language text data processed in S6 of the previous paragraph;20154MBW is the language text data processed in S7 of the previousparagraph; and 20154MBH is the language text data processed in S8 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0046]—This Paragraph [0046] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040])which displays a prompt on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time a word processoris closed. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of CommunicationDevice 200 initiates the closing process of the word processor inresponse to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to close the word processor (S1). In the process of closingthe word processor, the following steps of S2 through S5 areimplemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#18’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0033])and displays the corresponding language text data ‘Save’ at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area20654b1a (Paragraph [0033]) and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘Yes’ at the predetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ in LanguageTable#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0033]) and displays thecorresponding language text data ‘No’ at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#21’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph[0033]) and displays the corresponding language text data ‘Cancel’ atthe predetermined location in the word processor (S5). The save signalindicating to save the alphanumeric data input in S9 of Paragraph [0044]is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem, assuming that the user of Communication Device 200 intends tosave the data (S6), and the data are saved in a predetermined locationin RAM 206 (FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor is closed thereafter (S8).

Paragraph [0047]—This Paragraph [0047] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b (Paragraph [0046])is implemented. In the present embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data Displaying SoftwareFor Word Processor 20654c3a (Paragraph [0044]) is closed. In the presentembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composed of 201549PrS, 20154PrY,20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In the present embodiment, 201549PrS is thelanguage text data processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrYis the language text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph;20154PrN is the language text data processed in S4 of the previousparagraph; and 20154PrC is the language text data processed in S5 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0048]—This Paragraph [0048] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 stored in Multiple LanguageDisplaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040]) whichdisplays the language text data at the time a Windows Explorer likesoftware program which displays folders and/or directories and thestructures thereof is executed. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes Windows Explorer likesoftware program in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the softwareprogram (S1). In the process of displaying the Windows Explorer likesoftware program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), the steps of S2 through S4 areimplemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#15’ in Language Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0033])and displays the corresponding language text data ‘My Network’ at thepredetermined location in the Windows Explorer like software program(S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#16’ inLanguage Table#1 Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0033]) and displaysthe corresponding language text data ‘Trash’ at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S3). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ in Language Table#1Storage Area 20654b1a (Paragraph [0033]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘Local Disk’ at the predetermined location in theWindows Explorer like software program (S4).

Paragraph [0049]—This Paragraph [0049] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 (Paragraph [0048]) isexecuted. In the present embodiment, 20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr aredisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654c4 is executed. In the present embodiment,20154LD is the language text data processed in S4 of the previousparagraph; 20154MN is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; and 20154Tr is the language text data processed inS3 of the previous paragraph.

Paragraph [0050]—<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—UtilizingJapanese>>

Paragraph [0051]—This Paragraph [0051] illustrates Language SelectingSoftware 20654c1 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software StorageArea 20654c (Paragraph [0040]) which selects the language utilized tooperate Communication Device 200 from a plurality of languages. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves the language type data from Language Type Data Storage Area20654b2 (Paragraph [0038]) (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘Japanese’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654b2 (Paragraph [0038]), and stores the language table ID(Language Table#2) in Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654b4(Paragraph [0031]) (S4).

Paragraph [0052]—This Paragraph [0052] illustrates Selected LanguageDisplaying Software 20654c2 stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040]) which displays andoperates with the language selected in S3 of Paragraph [0051] (i.e.,Japanese). In the present embodiment, when Communication Device 200 ispowered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesthe selected language table ID (Language Table#2) from Selected LanguageTable ID Storage Area 20654b4 (Paragraph [0031]) (S2). CPU 211 thenidentifies the storage area corresponding to the language table IDselected in S2 (Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph[0035])) in Language Tables Storage Area 20654b1 (Paragraph [0032])(S3). Language text data displaying process is initiated thereafter ofwhich the details are described hereinafter (S4).

Paragraph [0053]—This Paragraph [0053] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040])which displays the language text data at the time a word processor, suchas MS Word and WordPerfect is executed. In the present embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes a word processor inresponse to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to activate and execute the word processor (S1). In theprocess of displaying the word processor on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S8 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ in Language Table#2Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0035]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data indicating ‘File’ in Japanese at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#9’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b(Paragraph [0035]) and displays the corresponding language text dataindicating ‘Edit’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#10’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0035])and displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘View’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#11’ in LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0035]) and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Format’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S5). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#12’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area20654b1b (Paragraph [0035]) and displays the corresponding language textdata indicating ‘Tools’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in theword processor (S6). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#13’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0035])and displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Window’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S7). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ in LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0035]) and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Help’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S8). Alphanumeric data isinput to the word processor by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system thereafter (S9).

Paragraph [0054]—This Paragraph [0054] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a (Paragraph [0053])is implemented. In the present embodiment, the word processor describedin Paragraph [0053] is primarily composed of Menu Bar 20154MB andAlphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA wherein the language text datadescribed in S2 through S8 of Paragraph [0053] are displayed on Menu Bar20154MB and alphanumeric data are input in Alphanumeric Data Input Area20154ADIA. In the present embodiment, 20154MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBE is the language textdata processed in S3 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBV is the languagetext data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is thelanguage text data processed in S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBTis the language text data processed in S6 of the previous paragraph;20154MBW is the language text data processed in S7 of the previousparagraph; and 20154MBH is the language text data processed in S8 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0055]—This Paragraph [0055] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040])which displays a prompt on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time a word processoris closed. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of CommunicationDevice 200 initiates the closing process of the word processor inresponse to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to close the word processor (S1). In the process of closingthe word processor, the following steps of S2 through S5 areimplemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#18’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0035])and displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Save’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ in LanguageTable#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0035]) and displays thecorresponding language text data indicating ‘Yes’ in Japanese at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area20654b1b (Paragraph [0035]) and displays the corresponding language textdata indicating ‘No’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in theword processor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#21’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph [0035])and displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘Cancel’ inJapanese at the predetermined location in the word processor (S5). Thesave signal indicating to save the alphanumeric data input in S9 ofParagraph [0053] is input by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system, assuming that the user of Communication Device200 intends to save the data (S6), and the data are saved in apredetermined location in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor isclosed thereafter (S8).

Paragraph [0056]—This Paragraph [0056] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b (Paragraph [0055])is implemented. In the present embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data Displaying SoftwareFor Word Processor 20654c3a (Paragraph [0053]) is closed. In the presentembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composed of 201549PrS, 20154PrY,20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In the present embodiment, 201549PrS is thelanguage text data processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrYis the language text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph;20154PrN is the language text data processed in S4 of the previousparagraph; and 20154PrC is the language text data processed in S5 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0057]—This Paragraph [0057] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 stored in Multiple LanguageDisplaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040]) whichdisplays the language text data at the time a Windows Explorer likesoftware program which displays folders and/or directories and thestructures thereof is executed. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes Windows Explorer likesoftware program in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the softwareprogram (S1). In the process of displaying the Windows Explorer likesoftware program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 throughS4 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#15’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b (Paragraph[0035]) and displays the corresponding language text data indicating ‘MyNetwork’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in the WindowsExplorer like software program (S2). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#16’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area 20654b1b(Paragraph [0035]) and displays the corresponding language text dataindicating ‘Trash’ in Japanese at the predetermined location in theWindows Explorer like software program (S3). CPU 211 identifies thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#17’ in Language Table#2 Storage Area20654b1b (Paragraph [0035]) and displays the corresponding language textdata indicating ‘Local Disk’ in Japanese at the predetermined locationin the Windows Explorer like software program (S4).

Paragraph [0058]—This Paragraph [0058] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 (Paragraph [0057]) isexecuted. In the present embodiment, 20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr aredisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654c4 is executed. In the present embodiment,20154LD is the language text data processed in S4 of the previousparagraph; 20154MN is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; and 20154Tr is the language text data processed inS3 of the previous paragraph.

Paragraph [0059]—<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—UtilizingFrench>>

Paragraph [0060]—This Paragraph [0060] illustrates Language SelectingSoftware 20654c1 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software StorageArea 20654c (Paragraph [0040]) which selects the language utilized tooperate Communication Device 200 from a plurality of languages. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves the language type data from Language Type Data Storage Area20654b2 (Paragraph [0038]) (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘French’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654b2 (Paragraph [0038]), and stores the language table ID(Language Table#3) in Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654b4(Paragraph [0031]) (S4).

Paragraph [0061]—This Paragraph [0061] illustrates Selected LanguageDisplaying Software 20654c2 stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040]) which displays andoperates with the language selected in S3 of Paragraph [0060] (i.e.,French). In the present embodiment, when Communication Device 200 ispowered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesthe selected language table ID (Language Table#3) from Selected LanguageTable ID Storage Area 20654b4 (Paragraph [0031]) (S2). CPU 211 thenidentifies the storage area corresponding to the language table IDselected in S2 (Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph[0036])) in Language Tables Storage Area 20654b1 (Paragraph [0032])(S3). Language text data displaying process is initiated thereafter ofwhich the details are described hereinafter (S4).

Paragraph [0062]—This Paragraph [0062] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040])which displays the language text data at the time a word processor, suchas MS Word and WordPerfect is executed. In the present embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes a word processor inresponse to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to activate and execute the word processor (S1). In theprocess of displaying the word processor on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S8 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ in Language Table#3Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph [0036]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#8’ indicating ‘File’ in French at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area20654b1c (Paragraph [0036]) and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French#9’ indicating ‘Edit’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#10’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c(Paragraph [0036]) and displays the corresponding language text data‘French#10’ indicating ‘View’ in French at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#11’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph[0036]) and displays the corresponding language text data ‘French#11’indicating ‘Format’ in French at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S5). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#12’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph [0036])and displays the corresponding language text data ‘French#12’ indicating‘Tools’ in French at the predetermined location in the word processor(S6). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ inLanguage Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph [0036]) and displaysthe corresponding language text data ‘French#13’ indicating ‘Window’ inFrench at the predetermined location in the word processor (S7). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ in Language Table#3Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph [0036]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#14’ indicating ‘Help’ in French at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S 8). Alphanumeric data isinput to the word processor by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system thereafter (S9).

Paragraph [0063]—This Paragraph [0063] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a (Paragraph [0062])is implemented. In the present embodiment, the word processor describedin Paragraph [0062] is primarily composed of Menu Bar 20154MB andAlphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA wherein the language text datadescribed in S2 through S8 of Paragraph [0062] are displayed on Menu Bar20154MB and alphanumeric data are input in Alphanumeric Data Input Area20154ADIA. In the present embodiment, 20154MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBE is the language textdata processed in S3 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBV is the languagetext data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is thelanguage text data processed in S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBTis the language text data processed in S6 of the previous paragraph;20154MBW is the language text data processed in S7 of the previousparagraph; and 20154MBH is the language text data processed in S8 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0064]—This Paragraph [0064] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040])which displays a prompt on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time a word processoris closed. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of CommunicationDevice 200 initiates the closing process of the word processor inresponse to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to close the word processor (S1). In the process of closingthe word processor, the following steps of S2 through S5 areimplemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#18’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph [0036])and displays the corresponding language text data ‘French#18’ indicating‘Save’ in French at the predetermined location in the word processor(S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#19’ inLanguage Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph [0036]) and displaysthe corresponding language text data ‘French#19’ indicating ‘Yes’ inFrench at the predetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ in Language Table#3Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph [0036]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#20’ indicating ‘No’ in French at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area20654b1c (Paragraph [0036]) and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French#21’ indicating ‘Cancel’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S5). The save signal indicating to savethe alphanumeric data input in S9 of Paragraph [0062] is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system,assuming that the user of Communication Device 200 intends to save thedata (S6), and the data are saved in a predetermined location in RAM 206(FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor is closed thereafter (S8).

Paragraph [0065]—This Paragraph [0065] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b (Paragraph [0064])is implemented. In the present embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data Displaying SoftwareFor Word Processor 20654c3a (Paragraph [0062]) is closed. In the presentembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composed of 201549PrS, 20154PrY,20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In the present embodiment, 201549PrS is thelanguage text data processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrYis the language text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph;20154PrN is the language text data processed in S4 of the previousparagraph; and 20154PrC is the language text data processed in S5 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0066]—This Paragraph [0066] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 stored in Multiple LanguageDisplaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040]) whichdisplays the language text data at the time a Windows Explorer likesoftware program which displays folders and/or directories and thestructures thereof is executed. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes Windows Explorer likesoftware program in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the softwareprogram (S1). In the process of displaying the Windows Explorer likesoftware program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 throughS4 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#15’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph[0036]) and displays the corresponding language text data ‘French#15’indicating ‘My Network’ in French at the predetermined location in theWindows Explorer like software program (S2). CPU 211 identifies thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#16’ in Language Table#3 Storage Area20654b1c (Paragraph [0036]) and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘French#16’ indicating ‘Trash’ in French at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S3). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ in Language Table#3Storage Area 20654b1c (Paragraph [0036]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘French#17’ indicating ‘Local Disk’ in French at thepredetermined location in the Windows Explorer like software program(S4).

Paragraph [0067]—This Paragraph [0067] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 (Paragraph [0066]) isexecuted. In the present embodiment, 20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr aredisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654c4 is executed. In the present embodiment,20154LD is the language text data processed in S4 of the previousparagraph; 20154MN is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; and 20154Tr is the language text data processed inS3 of the previous paragraph.

Paragraph [0068]—<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—UtilizingGerman>>

Paragraph [0069]—This Paragraph [0069] illustrates Language SelectingSoftware 20654c1 stored in Multiple Language Displaying Software StorageArea 20654c (Paragraph [0040]) which selects the language utilized tooperate Communication Device 200 from a plurality of languages. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves the language type data from Language Type Data Storage Area20654b2 (Paragraph [0038]) (S1), and Displays a list of availablelanguages on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). In the present example, thefollowing languages are displayed on LCD 201: English, Japanese, French,and German. A certain language is selected therefrom by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Assume that‘German’ is selected in S3. CPU 211 then identifies the language tableID corresponding to the language type data in Language Type Data StorageArea 20654b2 (Paragraph [0038]), and stores the language table ID(Language Table#4) in Selected Language Table ID Storage Area 20654b4(Paragraph [0031]) (S4).

Paragraph [0070]—This Paragraph [0070] illustrates Selected LanguageDisplaying Software 20654c2 stored in Multiple Language DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040]) which displays andoperates with the language selected in S3 of Paragraph [0069] (i.e.,German). In the present embodiment, when Communication Device 200 ispowered on (S1), CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesthe selected language table ID (Language Table#4) from Selected LanguageTable ID Storage Area 20654b4 (Paragraph [0031]) (S2). CPU 211 thenidentifies the storage area corresponding to the language table IDselected in S2 (Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph[0037])) in Language Tables Storage Area 20654b1 (Paragraph [0032])(S3). Language text data displaying process is initiated thereafter ofwhich the details are described hereinafter (S4).

Paragraph [0071]—This Paragraph [0071] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040])which displays the language text data at the time a word processor, suchas MS Word and WordPerfect is executed. In the present embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes a word processor inresponse to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to activate and execute the word processor (S1). In theprocess of displaying the word processor on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), thefollowing steps of S2 through S8 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#8’ in Language Table#4Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph [0037]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#8’ indicating ‘File’ in German at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S2). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#9’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area20654b1d (Paragraph [0037]) and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘German#9’ indicating ‘Edit’ in German at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S3). CPU 211 identifies the languageitem ID ‘Language Item#10’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654b1d(Paragraph [0037]) and displays the corresponding language text data‘German#10’ indicating ‘View’ in German at the predetermined location inthe word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#11’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph[0037]) and displays the corresponding language text data ‘German#11’indicating ‘Format’ in German at the predetermined location in the wordprocessor (S5). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#12’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph [0037])and displays the corresponding language text data ‘German#12’ indicating‘Tools’ in German at the predetermined location in the word processor(S6). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#13’ inLanguage Table#4 Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph [0037]) and displaysthe corresponding language text data ‘German#13’ indicating ‘Window’ inGerman at the predetermined location in the word processor (S7). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#14’ in Language Table#4Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph [0037]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#14’ indicating ‘Help’ in German at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S8). Alphanumeric data isinput to the word processor by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system thereafter (S9).

Paragraph [0072]—This Paragraph [0072] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3a (Paragraph [0071])is implemented. In the present embodiment, the word processor describedin Paragraph [0071] is primarily composed of Menu Bar 20154MB andAlphanumeric Data Input Area 20154ADIA wherein the language text datadescribed in S2 through S8 of Paragraph [0071] are displayed on Menu Bar20154MB and alphanumeric data are input in Alphanumeric Data Input Area20154ADIA. In the present embodiment, 20154MBF is the language text dataprocessed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBE is the language textdata processed in S3 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBV is the languagetext data processed in S4 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBF is thelanguage text data processed in S5 of the previous paragraph; 20154MBTis the language text data processed in S6 of the previous paragraph;20154MBW is the language text data processed in S7 of the previousparagraph; and 20154MBH is the language text data processed in S8 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0073]—This Paragraph [0073] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b stored in MultipleLanguage Displaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040])which displays a prompt on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time a word processoris closed. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of CommunicationDevice 200 initiates the closing process of the word processor inresponse to the signal input by the user of Communication Device 200indicating to close the word processor (S1). In the process of closingthe word processor, the following steps of S2 through S5 areimplemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID ‘LanguageItem#18’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph [0037])and displays the corresponding language text data ‘German#18’ indicating‘Save’ in German at the predetermined location in the word processor(S2). CPU 211 identifies the language item ID Language ‘Item#19’ inLanguage Table#4 Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph [0037]) and displaysthe corresponding language text data ‘German#19’ indicating ‘Yes’ inGerman at the predetermined location in the word processor (S3). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#20’ in Language Table#4Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph [0037]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#20’ indicating ‘No’ in German at thepredetermined location in the word processor (S4). CPU 211 identifiesthe language item ID ‘Language Item#21’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area20654b1d (Paragraph [0037]) and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘German#21’ indicating ‘Cancel’ in German at the predeterminedlocation in the word processor (S5). The save signal indicating to savethe alphanumeric data input in S9 of Paragraph [0071] is input byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system,assuming that the user of Communication Device 200 intends to save thedata (S6), and the data are saved in a predetermined location in RAM 206(FIG. 1) (S7). The word processor is closed thereafter (S8).

Paragraph [0074]—This Paragraph [0074] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Word Processor 20654c3b (Paragraph [0073])is implemented. In the present embodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data Displaying SoftwareFor Word Processor 20654c3a (Paragraph [0071]) is closed. In the presentembodiment, Prompt 20154Pr is primarily composed of 201549PrS, 20154PrY,20154PrN, and 20154PrC. In the present embodiment, 201549PrS is thelanguage text data processed in S2 of the previous paragraph; 20154PrYis the language text data processed in S3 of the previous paragraph;20154PrN is the language text data processed in S4 of the previousparagraph; and 20154PrC is the language text data processed in S5 of theprevious paragraph.

Paragraph [0075]—This Paragraph [0075] illustrates Language Text DataDisplaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 stored in Multiple LanguageDisplaying Software Storage Area 20654c (Paragraph [0040]) whichdisplays the language text data at the time a Windows Explorer likesoftware program which displays folders and/or directories and thestructures thereof is executed. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 executes Windows Explorer likesoftware program in response to the signal input by the user ofCommunication Device 200 indicating to activate and execute the softwareprogram (S1). In the process of displaying the Windows Explorer likesoftware program on LCD 201 (FIG. 1), the following steps of S2 throughS4 are implemented. Namely, CPU 211 identifies the language item ID‘Language Item#15’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph[0037]) and displays the corresponding language text data ‘German#15’indicating ‘My Network’ in German at the predetermined location in theWindows Explorer like software program (S2). CPU 211 identifies thelanguage item ID ‘Language Item#16’ in Language Table#4 Storage Area20654b1d (Paragraph [0037]) and displays the corresponding language textdata ‘German#16’ indicating ‘Trash’ in German at the predeterminedlocation in the Windows Explorer like software program (S3). CPU 211identifies the language item ID ‘Language Item#17’ in Language Table#4Storage Area 20654b1d (Paragraph [0037]) and displays the correspondinglanguage text data ‘German#17’ indicating ‘Local Disk’ in German at thepredetermined location in the Windows Explorer like software program(S4).

Paragraph [0076]—This Paragraph [0076] illustrates the data displayed onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 at the time Language TextData Displaying Software For Explorer 20654c4 (Paragraph [0075]) isexecuted. In the present embodiment, 20154LD, 20154MN, and 20154Tr aredisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) at the time Language Text Data DisplayingSoftware For Explorer 20654c4 is executed. In the present embodiment,20154LD is the language text data processed in S4 of the previousparagraph; 20154MN is the language text data processed in S2 of theprevious paragraph; and 20154Tr is the language text data processed inS3 of the previous paragraph.

Paragraph [0077]—<<Multiple Language Displaying Function—Utilizing OtherLanguages>>

Paragraph [0078]—For the avoidance of doubt, the present function is notlimited to select a language, to operate Communication Device 200, onlyfrom the foregoing four languages of English, Japanese, French, andGerman. The present function is also capable to select a language fromDutch, Chinese, Arabic, Korean, Spanish, Italian, and any otherlanguages existing in this world, in addition to the foregoing fourlanguages.

Paragraph [0079]—<<Caller's Information Displaying Function>>

Paragraph [0080]—Paragraph [0084] through Paragraph [0129] illustratethe Caller's Information displaying function which displays theInformation regarding the caller (e.g., name, phone number, emailaddress, and home address, etc.) on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) when CommunicationDevice 200 is utilized as a ‘TV phone’.

Paragraph [0081]—Paragraph [0084] through Paragraph [0091] illustratethe data and software programs stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Caller'sDevice, a Communication Device 200, utilized by the caller.

Paragraph [0082]—Paragraph [0092] through Paragraph [0099] illustratethe data and software programs stored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Callee'sDevice, a Communication Device 200, utilized by the callee.

Paragraph [0083]—Paragraph [0100] through Paragraph [0103] illustratethe data and software programs stored in Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0084]—This Paragraph [0084] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In the presentembodiment, RAM 206 of Caller's Device includes Caller's InformationDisplaying Information Storage Area 20655a of which the data and thesoftware programs stored therein are described in Paragraph [0085].

Paragraph [0085]—This Paragraph [0085] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655a (Paragraph [0084]). In the present embodiment, Caller'sInformation Displaying Information Storage Area 20655a includes Caller'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655b and Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655c. Caller's Information DisplayingData Storage Area 20655b stores the data necessary to implement thepresent function on the side of Caller's Device, such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0086] through Paragraph [0090]. Caller'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function on the side ofCaller's Device, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0091].

Paragraph [0086]—This Paragraph [0086] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655b. Inthe present embodiment, Caller's Information Displaying Data StorageArea 20655b includes Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1,Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2, Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b3, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4,Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5, Callee's CalculatedGPS Data Storage Area 20655b6, Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7,Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655b8, and Work Area 20655b9. Caller'sAudiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1 stores the data described inParagraph [0087]. Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2 storesthe data described in Paragraph [0088]. Caller's Personal Data StorageArea 20655b3 stores the data described in Paragraph [0089]. Callee'sPersonal Data Storage Area 20655b4 stores the data described inParagraph [0090]. Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5stores the caller's calculated GPS data which represents the currentgeographic location of Caller's Device in (x, y, z) format. Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6 stores the callee's calculatedGPS data which represents the current geographic location of Callee'sDevice in (x, y, z) format. Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7stores the map data representing the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. Callee's Map Data StorageArea 20655b8 stores the map data representing the surrounding area ofthe location indicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. Work Area20655b9 is a storage area utilized to perform calculation and totemporarily store data.

Paragraph [0087]—This Paragraph [0087] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1 (Paragraph[0086]). In the present embodiment, Caller's Audiovisual Data StorageArea 20655b1 includes Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b1a andCaller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1b. Caller's Audio Data StorageArea 20655b1a stores the caller's audio data which represents the audiodata input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. Caller'sVisual Data Storage Area 20655b1b stores the caller's visual data whichrepresents the visual data input via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) of Caller'sDevice.

Paragraph [0088]—This Paragraph [0088] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2 (Paragraph[0086]). In the present embodiment, Callee's Audiovisual Data StorageArea 20655b2 includes Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2a andCallee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b2b. Callee's Audio Data StorageArea 20655b2a stores the callee's audio data which represents the audiodata sent from Callee's Device. Callee's Visual Data Storage Area20655b2b stores the callee's visual data which represents the visualdata sent from Callee's Device.

Paragraph [0089]—This Paragraph [0089] illustrates the data stored inCaller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3 (Paragraph [0086]). In thepresent embodiment, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3comprises two columns, i.e., ‘Caller's Personal Data’ and ‘PermittedCaller's Personal Data Flag’. Column ‘Caller's Personal Data’ stores thecaller's personal data which represent the personal data of the caller.Column ‘Permitted Caller's Personal Data Flag’ stores the permittedcaller's personal data flag and each permitted caller's personal dataflag represents whether the corresponding caller's personal data ispermitted to be displayed on Callee's Device. The permitted caller'spersonal data flag is represented by either ‘1’ or ‘0’ wherein ‘1’indicates that the corresponding caller's personal data is permitted tobe displayed on Callee's Device, and ‘0’ indicates that thecorresponding caller's personal data is not permitted to be displayed onCallee's Device. In the present embodiment, Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b3 stores the following data: the caller's name andthe corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘1’; thecaller's phone number and the corresponding permitted caller's personaldata flag ‘1’; the caller's email address and the correspondingpermitted caller's personal data flag ‘1’; the caller's home address andthe corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘1’; thecaller's business address and the corresponding permitted caller'spersonal data flag ‘0’; the caller's title and the correspondingpermitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller's hobby and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’; the caller'sblood type and the corresponding permitted caller's personal data flag‘0’; the caller's gender and the corresponding permitted caller'spersonal data flag ‘0’; the caller's age and the corresponding permittedcaller's personal data flag ‘0’; and caller's date of birth and thecorresponding permitted caller's personal data flag ‘0’.

Paragraph [0090]—This Paragraph [0090] illustrates the data stored inCallee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4 (Paragraph [0086]). In thepresent embodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4 storesthe callee's personal data which represent the personal data of thecallee which are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. Inthe present embodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4stores the callee's name and phone number.

Paragraph [0091]—This Paragraph [0091] illustrates the software programsstored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c(Paragraph [0085]). In the present embodiment, Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655c stores Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Selecting Software 20655c1, Dialing Software 20655c2,Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3, Map DataSending/Receiving Software 20655c4, Caller's Audiovisual Data CollectingSoftware 20655c5, Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software20655c6, Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6a,Permitted Callee's Personal Data Displaying Software 20655c7, MapDisplaying Software 20655c8, Callee's Audio Data Outputting Software20655c9, and Callee's Visual Data Displaying Software 20655c10.Permitted Caller's Personal Data Selecting Software 20655c1 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0105]. Dialing Software 20655c2is the software program described in Paragraph [0106]. Caller's DevicePin-pointing Software 20655c3 is the software program described inParagraph [0107] and Paragraph [0108]. Map Data Sending/ReceivingSoftware 20655c4 is the software program described in Paragraph [0109].Caller's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655c5 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0110]. Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software 20655c6 is the software program described inParagraph [0111]. Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software20655c6a is the software program described in Paragraph [0125].Permitted Callee's Personal Data Displaying Software 20655c7 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0126]. Map Displaying Software20655c8 is the software program described in Paragraph [0127]. Callee'sAudio Data Outputting Software 20655c9 is the software program describedin Paragraph [0128]. Callee's Visual Data Displaying Software 20655c10is the software program described in Paragraph [0129].

Paragraph [0092]—This Paragraph [0092] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206A (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In the presentembodiment, RAM 206A of Callee's Device includes Callee's InformationDisplaying Information Storage Area 20655aA of which the data and thesoftware programs stored therein are described in Paragraph [0093].

Paragraph [0093]—This Paragraph [0093] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Callee's Information Displaying Information Storage Area20655aA (Paragraph [0092]). In the present embodiment, Callee'sInformation Displaying Information Storage Area 20655aA includesCallee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655bA and Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA. Callee'sInformation Displaying Data Storage Area 20655bA stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Callee'sDevice, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0094] through Paragraph[0098]. Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cAstores the software programs necessary to implement the present functionon the side of Callee's Device, such as the ones described in Paragraph[0099].

Paragraph [0094]—This Paragraph [0094] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Callee's Information Displaying Data Storage Area 20655bA.In the present embodiment, Callee's Information Displaying Data StorageArea 20655bA includes Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1A,Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2A, Caller's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b3A, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A,Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5A, Callee's CalculatedGPS Data Storage Area 20655b6A, Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7A,Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655b8A, and Work Area 20655b9A.Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1A stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0095]. Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area20655b2A stores the data described in Paragraph [0096]. Caller'sPersonal Data Storage Area 20655b3A stores the data described inParagraph [0097]. Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A storesthe data described in Paragraph [0098]. Caller's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area 20655b5A stores the caller's calculated GPS data whichrepresents the current geographic location of Caller's Device in (x, y,z) format. Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6A stores thecallee's calculated GPS data which represents the current geographiclocation of Callee's Device in (x, y, z) format. Caller's Map DataStorage Area 20655b7A stores the map data representing the surroundingarea of the location indicated by the caller's calculated GPS data.Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655b8A stores the map data representingthe surrounding area of the location indicated by the callee'scalculated GPS data. Work Area 20655b9A is a storage area utilized toperform calculation and to temporarily store data.

Paragraph [0095]—This Paragraph [0095] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b1A (Paragraph[0094]). In the present embodiment, Caller's Audiovisual Data StorageArea 20655b1A includes Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b1aA andCaller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1bA. Caller's Audio Data StorageArea 20655b1aA stores the caller's audio data which represents the audiodata sent from Caller's Device in a wireless fashion. Caller's VisualData Storage Area 20655b1bA stores the caller's visual data whichrepresents the visual data input sent from Caller's Device in a wirelessfashion.

Paragraph [0096]—This Paragraph [0096] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Callee's Audiovisual Data Storage Area 20655b2A (Paragraph[0094]). In the present embodiment, Callee's Audiovisual Data StorageArea 20655b2A includes Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2aA andCallee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b2bA. Callee's Audio Data StorageArea 20655b2aA stores the callee's audio data which represents the audiodata input via Microphone 215 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. Callee'sVisual Data Storage Area 20655b2bA stores the callee's visual data whichrepresents the visual data input via CCD Unit 214 (FIG. 1) of Callee'sDevice.

Paragraph [0097]—This Paragraph [0097] illustrates the data stored inCaller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3A (Paragraph [0094]). In thepresent embodiment, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3A storesthe caller's personal data which represent the personal data of thecaller which are displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. Inthe present embodiment, Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3Astores the caller's name, phone number, email address, and home address.

Paragraph [0098]—This Paragraph [0098] illustrates the data stored inCallee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A (Paragraph [0094]). In thepresent embodiment, Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4Acomprises two columns, i.e., ‘Callee's Personal Data’ and ‘PermittedCallee's Personal Data Flag’. Column ‘Callee's Personal Data’ stores thecallee's personal data which represent the personal data of the callee.Column ‘Permitted Callee's Personal Data Flag’ stores the permittedcallee's personal data flag and each permitted callee's personal dataflag represents whether the corresponding callee's personal data ispermitted to be displayed on Caller's Device. The permitted callee'spersonal data flag is represented by either ‘1’ or ‘0’ wherein ‘1’indicates that the corresponding callee's personal data is permitted tobe displayed on Caller's Device, and ‘0’ indicates that thecorresponding callee's personal data is not permitted to be displayed onCaller's Device. In the present embodiment, Callee's Personal DataStorage Area 20655b4A stores the following data: callee's name and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘1’; the callee'sphone number and the corresponding permitted callee's personal data flag‘1’; the callee's email address and the corresponding permitted caller'spersonal data flag ‘0’; the callee's home address and the correspondingpermitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee's business addressand the corresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; thecallee's title and the corresponding permitted callee's personal dataflag ‘0’; the callee's hobby and the corresponding permitted callee'spersonal data flag ‘0’; the callee's blood type and the correspondingpermitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee's gender and thecorresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; the callee'sage and the corresponding permitted callee's personal data flag ‘0’; andcallee's date of birth and the corresponding permitted callee's personaldata flag ‘0’.

Paragraph [0099]—This Paragraph [0099] illustrates the software programsstored in Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA(Paragraph [0093]). In the present embodiment, Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655cA stores Permitted Callee'sPersonal Data Selecting Software 20655c1A, Dialing Software 20655c2A,Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3A, Map DataSending/Receiving Software 20655c4A, Callee's Audiovisual DataCollecting Software 20655c5A, Callee's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware 20655c6A, Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software20655c6aA, Permitted Caller's Personal Data Displaying Software20655c7A, Map Displaying Software 20655c8A, Caller's Audio DataOutputting Software 20655c9A, and Caller's Visual Data DisplayingSoftware 20655c10A. Permitted Callee's Personal Data Selecting Software20655c1A is the software program described in Paragraph [0118]. DialingSoftware 20655c2A is the software program described in Paragraph [0119].Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3A is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0120] and Paragraph [0121]. Map DataSending/Receiving Software 20655c4A is the software program described inParagraph [0122]. Callee's Audiovisual Data Collecting Software 20655c5Ais the software program described in Paragraph [0123]. Callee'sInformation Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6A is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0124]. Caller's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware 20655c6aA is the software program described in Paragraph[0112]. Permitted Caller's Personal Data Displaying Software 20655c7A isthe software program described in Paragraph [0113]. Map DisplayingSoftware 20655c8A is the software program described in Paragraph [0114].Caller's Audio Data Outputting Software 20655c9A is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0115]. Caller's Visual Data Displaying Software20655c10A is the software program described in Paragraph [0116].

Paragraph [0100]—This Paragraph [0100] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Host H (Paragraph [0025]). In the present embodiment, Host Hincludes Caller/Callee Information Storage Area H55a of which the dataand the software programs stored therein are described in Paragraph[0101].

Paragraph [0101]—This Paragraph [0101] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller/Callee Information Storage Area H55a. In the presentembodiment, Caller/Callee Information Storage Area H55a includesCaller/Callee Data Storage Area H55b and Caller/Callee Software StorageArea H55c. Caller/Callee Data Storage Area H55b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H(Paragraph [0025]), such as the ones described in Paragraph [0102].Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described in Paragraph [0103].

Paragraph [0102]—This Paragraph [0102] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Caller/Callee Data Storage Area H55b. In the presentembodiment, Caller/Callee Data Storage Area H55b includes Caller'sInformation Storage Area H55b1, Callee's Information Storage Area H55b2,Map Data Storage Area H55b3, Work Area h55b4, Caller's Calculated GPSData Storage Area H55b5, and Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage AreaH55b6. Caller's Information Storage Area H55b1 stores the Caller'sInformation received Caller's Device. Callee's Information Storage AreaH55b2 stores the Callee's Information received Callee's Device. Map DataStorage Area H55b3 stores the map data received from Caller's Device andCallee's Device. Work Area H55b4 is a storage area utilized to performcalculation and to temporarily store data. Caller's Calculated GPS DataStorage Area H55b5 stores the caller's calculated GPS data. Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area H55b6 stores the callee's calculatedGPS data.

Paragraph [0103]—This Paragraph [0103] illustrates the software programsstored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c (Paragraph [0103]).In the present embodiment, Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55cstores Dialing Software H55c2, Caller's Device Pin-pointing SoftwareH55c3, Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software H55c3a, Map DataSending/Receiving Software H55c4, Caller's Information Sending/ReceivingSoftware H55c6, and Callee's Information Sending/Receiving SoftwareH55c6a. Dialing Software H55c2 is the software program described inParagraph [0106] and Paragraph [0119]. Caller's Device Pin-pointingSoftware H55c3 is the software program described in Paragraph [0107].Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software H55c3a is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0120]. Map Data Sending/Receiving Software H55c4is the software program described in Paragraph [0109] and Paragraph[0122]. Caller's Information Sending/Receiving Software H55c6 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0111]. Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55c6a is the software program described inParagraph [0124] and Paragraph [0125].

Paragraph [0104]—Paragraph [0105] through Paragraph [0116] primarilyillustrate the sequence to output the Caller's Information (which isdefined hereinafter) from Callee's Device.

Paragraph [0105]—This Paragraph [0105] illustrates Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Selecting Software 20655c1 stored in Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0091]) of Caller'sDevice, which selects the permitted caller's personal data to bedisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves all of thecaller's personal data from Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3(Paragraph [0089]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list of caller'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The caller selects, by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, the caller'spersonal data permitted to be displayed on Callee's Device (S3). Thepermitted caller's personal data flag of the data selected in S3 isregistered as ‘1’ (S4).

Paragraph [0106]—This Paragraph [0106] illustrates Dialing SoftwareH55c2 stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c (Paragraph[0103]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]), Dialing Software 20655c2 stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph[0091]) of Caller's Device, and Dialing Software 20655c2A stored inCallee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA (Paragraph[0099]) of Callee's Device, which enables to connect between Caller'sDevice and Callee's Device via Host H (Paragraph [0025]) in a wirelessfashion. In the present embodiment, a connection is established betweenCaller's Device and Host H (S1). Next, a connection is establishedbetween Host H and Callee's Device (S2). As a result, Caller's Deviceand Callee's Device are able to exchange audiovisual data, text data,and various types of data with each other. The connection is maintaineduntil Caller's Device, Host H, or Callee's Device terminates theconnection.

Paragraph [0107]—This Paragraph [0107] illustrates Caller's DevicePin-pointing Software H55c3 (Paragraph [0103]) stored in Caller/CalleeSoftware Storage Area H55c (Paragraph [0103]) of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3 stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph[0091]) of Caller's Device, which identifies the current geographiclocation of Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)of Caller's Device collects the GPS raw data from the near base stations(S1). CPU 211 sends the raw GPS data to Host H (S2). Upon receiving theraw GPS data (S3), Host H produces the caller's calculated GPS data byreferring to the raw GPS data (S4). Host H stores the caller'scalculated GPS data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55b5(Paragraph [0102]) (S5). Host H then retrieves the caller's calculatedGPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area H55b5 (Paragraph[0102]) (S6), and sends the data to Caller's Device (S7). Upon receivingthe caller's calculated GPS data from Host H (S8), CPU 211 stores thedata in Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5 (Paragraph[0086]) (S9). Here, the GPS raw data are the primitive data utilized toproduce the caller's calculated GPS data, and the caller's calculatedGPS data is the data representing the location of Caller's Device in (x,y, z) format. The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

Paragraph [0108]—This Paragraph [0108] illustrates another embodiment ofthe sequence described in Paragraph [0107] in which the entire processis performed solely by Caller's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c(Paragraph [0091]) of Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device collects the raw GPS data from the nearbase stations (S1). CPU 211 then produces the caller's calculated GPSdata by referring to the raw GPS data (S2), and stores the caller'scalculated GPS data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b5(Paragraph [0086]) (S3). The sequence described in the present paragraphis repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0109]—This Paragraph [0109] illustrates Map DataSending/Receiving Software H55c4 stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55c (Paragraph [0103]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andMap Data Sending/Receiving Software 20655c4 stored in Caller'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0091])of Caller's Device, which sends and receives the map data. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves thecaller's calculated GPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea 20655b5 (Paragraph [0086]) (S1), and sends the data to Host H (S2).Upon receiving the calculated GPS data from Caller's Device (S3), Host Hidentifies the map data in Map Data Storage Area H55b3 (Paragraph[0102]) (S4). Here, the map data represents the surrounding area of thelocation indicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. Host H retrievesthe map data from Map Data Storage Area H55b3 (Paragraph [0102]) (S5),and sends the data to Caller's Device (S6). Upon receiving the map datafrom Host H (S7), Caller's Device stores the data in Caller's Map DataStorage Area 20655b7 (Paragraph [0086]) (S8). The sequence described inthe present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0110]—This Paragraph [0110] illustrates Caller's AudiovisualData Collecting Software 20655c5 stored in Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0091]) of Caller'sDevice, which collects the audiovisual data of the caller to be sent toCallee's Device via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) thereof. CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device retrieves the caller's audiovisual data from CCD Unit214 and Microphone 215 (S1). CPU 211 then stores the caller's audio datain Caller's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b1a (Paragraph [0087]) (S2),and the caller's visual data in Caller's Visual Data Storage Area20655b1b (Paragraph [0087]) (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0111]—This Paragraph [0111] illustrates Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55c6 stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55c (Paragraph [0103]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andCaller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6 stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph[0091]) of Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Caller'sInformation (which is defined hereinafter) between Caller's Device andHost H. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Deviceretrieves the permitted caller's personal data from Caller's PersonalData Storage Area 20655b3 (Paragraph [0089]) (S1). CPU 211 retrieves thecaller's calculated GPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea 20655b5 (Paragraph [0086]) (S2). CPU 211 retrieves the map datafrom Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7 (Paragraph [0086]) (S3). CPU211 retrieves the caller's audio data from Caller's Audio Data StorageArea 20655b1a (Paragraph [0087]) (S4). CPU 211 retrieves the caller'svisual data from Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1b (Paragraph[0087]) (S5). CPU 211 then sends the data retrieved in S1 through S5(collectively defined as the ‘Caller's Information’ hereinafter) to HostH (S6). Upon receiving the Caller's Information from Caller's Device(S7), Host H stores the Caller's Information in Caller's InformationStorage Area H55b1 (Paragraph [0102]) (S8). The sequence described inthe present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0112]—This Paragraph [0112] illustrates Caller's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55c6 stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55c (Paragraph [0103]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andCaller's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6aA (Paragraph[0099]) stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area20655c (Paragraph [0091]) of Caller's Device, which sends and receivesthe Caller's Information between Host H and Callee's Device. In thepresent embodiment, Host H retrieves the Caller's Information fromCaller's Information Storage Area H55b1 (Paragraph [0102]) (S1), andsends the Caller's Information to Callee's Device (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)of Callee's Device receives the Caller's Information from Host H (S3).CPU 211 stores the permitted caller's personal data in Caller's PersonalData Storage Area 20655b3A (Paragraph [0097]) (S4). CPU 211 stores thecaller's calculated GPS data in Caller's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea 20655b5A (Paragraph [0094]) (S5). CPU 211 stores the map data inCaller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7A (Paragraph [0094]) (S6). CPU 211stores the caller's audio data in Caller's Audio Data Storage Area20655b1aA (Paragraph [0095]) (S7). CPU 211 stores the caller's visualdata in Caller's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b1bA (Paragraph [0095])(S8). The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

Paragraph [0113]—This Paragraph [0113] illustrates Permitted Caller'sPersonal Data Displaying Software 20655c7A stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA (Paragraph [0099])of Callee's Device, which displays the permitted caller's personal dataon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device. In the present embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the permitted caller'spersonal data from Caller's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b3A(Paragraph [0097]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays the permitted caller'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in thepresent paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0114]—This Paragraph [0114] illustrates Map DisplayingSoftware 20655c8A stored in Callee's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655cA (Paragraph [0099]) of Callee's Device, whichdisplays the map representing the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the caller's calculated GPS data. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves the caller'scalculated GPS data from Caller's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area20655b5A (Paragraph [0094]) (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the map datafrom Caller's Map Data Storage Area 20655b7A (Paragraph [0094]) (S2),and arranges on the map data the caller's current location icon inaccordance with the caller's calculated GPS data (S3). Here, thecaller's current location icon is an icon which represents the locationof Caller's Device in the map data. The map with the caller's currentlocation icon is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S4). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0115]—This Paragraph [0115] illustrates Caller's Audio DataOutputting Software 20655c9A stored in Caller's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0091]) of Caller's Device,which outputs the caller's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) ofCallee's Device. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee'sDevice retrieves the caller's audio data from Caller's Audio DataStorage Area 20655b1aA (Paragraph [0095]) (S1). CPU 211 then outputs thecaller's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0116]—This Paragraph [0116] illustrates Caller's Visual DataDisplaying Software 20655c10A stored in Callee's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655cA (Paragraph [0099]) of Callee's Device,which displays the caller's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Callee'sDevice. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Deviceretrieves the caller's visual data from Caller's Visual Data StorageArea 20655b1bA (Paragraph [0095]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays thecaller's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described inthe present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0117]—Paragraph [0118] through Paragraph [0129] primarilyillustrate the sequence to output the Callee's Information (which isdefined hereinafter) from Caller's Device.

Paragraph [0118]—This Paragraph [0118] illustrates Permitted Callee'sPersonal Data Selecting Software 20655c1A stored in Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655cA (Paragraph [0099]) of Callee'sDevice, which selects the permitted callee's personal data to bedisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves all of thecallee's personal data from Callee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A(Paragraph [0098]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays a list of callee'spersonal data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The callee selects, by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system, the callee'spersonal data permitted to be displayed on Caller's Device (S3). Thepermitted callee's personal data flag of the data selected in S3 isregistered as ‘1’ (S4).

Paragraph [0119]—This Paragraph [0119] illustrates Dialing SoftwareH55c2 stored in Caller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c (Paragraph[0103]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]), Dialing Software 20655c2A storedin Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA(Paragraph [0099]) of Callee's Device, and Dialing Software 20655c2stored in Caller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c(Paragraph [0091]) of Caller's Device, which enables to connect betweenCallee's Device and Caller's Device via Host H (Paragraph [0025]) in awireless fashion. In the present embodiment, a connection is establishedbetween Callee's Device and Host H (S1). Next, a connection isestablished between Host H and Caller's Device (S2). As a result,Callee's Device and Caller's Device are able to exchange audiovisualdata, text data, and various types of data with each other. The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is not necessarily implemented if theconnection between Caller's Device and Callee's Device is established asdescribed in Paragraph [0106]. The sequence described in the presentparagraph may be implemented if the connection is accidentallyterminated by Callee's Device and the connection process is initiated byCallee's Device.

Paragraph [0120]—This Paragraph [0120] illustrates Callee's DevicePin-pointing Software H55c3a stored in Caller/Callee Software StorageArea H55c (Paragraph [0103]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Callee'sDevice Pin-pointing Software 20655c3A stored in Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655cA of Callee's Device, whichidentifies the current geographic location of Callee's Device. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device collects the GPSraw data from the near base stations (S1). CPU 211 sends the raw GPSdata to Host H (S2). Upon receiving the raw GPS data (S3), Host Hproduces the callee's calculated GPS data by referring to the raw GPSdata (S4). Host H stores the callee's calculated GPS data in Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area H55b6 (Paragraph [0102]) (S5). Host Hthen retrieves the callee's calculated GPS data from Callee's CalculatedGPS Data Storage Area H55b6 (Paragraph [0102]) (S6), and sends the datato Callee's Device (S7). Upon receiving the callee's calculated GPS datafrom Host H (S8), CPU 211 stores the data in Callee's Calculated GPSData Storage Area 20655b6A (Paragraph [0094]) (S9). Here, the GPS rawdata are the primitive data utilized to produce the callee's calculatedGPS data, and the callee's calculated GPS data is the data representingthe location of Callee's Device in (x, y, z) format. The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0121]—This Paragraph [0121] illustrates another embodiment ofthe sequence described in Paragraph [0120] in which the entire processis performed solely by Callee's Device Pin-pointing Software 20655c3Astored in Callee's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA(Paragraph [0099]) of Callee's Device. In the present embodiment, CPU211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device collects the raw GPS data from the nearbase stations (S1). CPU 211 then produces the callee's calculated GPSdata by referring to the raw GPS data (S2), and stores the callee'scalculated GPS data in Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area20655b6A (Paragraph [0094]) (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0122]—This Paragraph [0122] illustrates Map DataSending/Receiving Software H55c4 stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55c (Paragraph [0103]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andMap Data Sending/Receiving Software 20655c4A stored in Callee'sInformation Displaying Software Storage Area 20655cA (Paragraph [0099])of Callee's Device, which sends and receives the map data. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Callee's Device retrieves thecallee's calculated GPS data from Callee's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea 20655b6A (Paragraph [0094]) (S1), and sends the data to Host H(S2). Upon receiving the calculated GPS data from Callee's Device (S3),Host H identifies the map data in Map Data Storage Area H55b3 (Paragraph[0102]) (S4). Here, the map data represents the surrounding area of thelocation indicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. Host H retrievesthe map data from Map Data Storage Area H55b3 (Paragraph [0102]) (S5),and sends the data to Callee's Device (S6). Upon receiving the map datafrom Host H (S7), Callee's Device stores the data in Callee's Map DataStorage Area 20655b8A (Paragraph [0094]) (S8). The sequence described inthe present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0123]—This Paragraph [0123] illustrates Callee's AudiovisualData Collecting Software 20655c5A stored in Callee's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655cA (Paragraph [0099]) of Callee'sDevice, which collects the audiovisual data of the callee to be sent toCaller's Device via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) thereof CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCallee's Device retrieves the callee's audiovisual data from CCD Unit214 and Microphone 215 (S1). CPU 211 then stores the callee's audio datain Callee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2aA (Paragraph [0096]) (S2),and the callee's visual data in Callee's Visual Data Storage Area20655b2bA (Paragraph [0096]) (S3). The sequence described in the presentparagraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0124]—This Paragraph [0124] illustrates Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55c6a (Paragraph [0103]) stored inCaller/Callee Software Storage Area H55c (Paragraph [0103]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Callee's Information Sending/Receiving Software20655c6A (Paragraph [0099]) stored in Callee's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655cA of Callee's Device, which sends andreceives the Callee's Information (which is defined hereinafter) betweenCallee's Device and Host H. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)of Callee's Device retrieves the permitted callee's personal data fromCallee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4A (Paragraph [0098]) (S1).CPU 211 retrieves the callee's calculated GPS data from Callee'sCalculated GPS Data Storage Area 20655b6A (Paragraph [0094]) (S2). CPU211 retrieves the map data from Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655b8A(Paragraph [0094]) (S3). CPU 211 retrieves the callee's audio data fromCallee's Audio Data Storage Area 20655b2aA (Paragraph [0096]) (S4). CPU211 retrieves the callee's visual data from Callee's Visual Data StorageArea 20655b2bA (Paragraph [0096]) (S5). CPU 211 then sends the dataretrieved in S1 through S5 (collectively defined as the ‘Callee'sInformation’ hereinafter) to Host H (S6). Upon receiving the Callee'sInformation from Callee's Device (S7), Host H stores the Callee'sInformation in Callee's Information Storage Area H55b2 (Paragraph[0102]) (S8). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

Paragraph [0125]—This Paragraph [0125] illustrates Callee's InformationSending/Receiving Software H55c6a stored in Caller/Callee SoftwareStorage Area H55c (Paragraph [0103]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andCallee's Information Sending/Receiving Software 20655c6a stored inCaller's Information Displaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph[0091]) of Caller's Device, which sends and receives the Callee'sInformation between Host H and Caller's Device. In the presentembodiment, Host H retrieves the Callee's Information from Callee'sInformation Storage Area H55b2 (Paragraph [0102]) (S1), and sends theCallee's Information to Caller's Device (S2). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device receives the Callee's Information from Host H (S3). CPU211 stores the permitted callee's personal data in Callee's PersonalData Storage Area 20655b4 (Paragraph [0090]) (S4). CPU 211 stores thecallee's calculated GPS data in Callee's Calculated GPS Data StorageArea 20655b6 (Paragraph [0086]) (S5). CPU 211 stores the map data inCallee's Map Data Storage Area 20655b8 (Paragraph [0086]) (S6). CPU 211stores the callee's audio data in Callee's Audio Data Storage Area20655b2a (Paragraph [0088]) (S7). CPU 211 stores the callee's visualdata in Callee's Visual Data Storage Area 20655b2b (Paragraph [0088])(S8). The sequence described in the present paragraph is repeatedperiodically.

Paragraph [0126]—This Paragraph [0126] illustrates Permitted Callee'sPersonal Data Displaying Software 20655c7 stored in Caller's InformationDisplaying Software Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0091]) of Caller'sDevice, which displays the permitted callee's personal data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) of Caller's Device. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)of Caller's Device retrieves the permitted callee's personal data fromCallee's Personal Data Storage Area 20655b4 (Paragraph [0090]) (S1). CPU211 then displays the permitted callee's personal data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described in the present paragraph isrepeated periodically.

Paragraph [0127]—This Paragraph [0127] illustrates Map DisplayingSoftware 20655c8 stored in Caller's Information Displaying SoftwareStorage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0091]) of Caller's Device, whichdisplays the map representing the surrounding area of the locationindicated by the callee's calculated GPS data. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Device retrieves the callee'scalculated GPS data from Callee's Calculated GPS Data Storage Area20655b6 (Paragraph [0086]) (S1). CPU 211 then retrieves the map datafrom Callee's Map Data Storage Area 20655b8 (Paragraph [0086]) (S2), andarranges on the map data the callee's current location icon inaccordance with the callee's calculated GPS data (S3). Here, thecallee's current location icon is an icon which represents the locationof Callee's Device in the map data. The map with the callee's currentlocation icon is displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S4). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0128]—This Paragraph [0128] illustrates Callee's Audio DataOutputting Software 20655c9 stored in Caller's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0091]) of Caller's Device,which outputs the callee's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) ofCaller's Device. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller'sDevice retrieves the callee's audio data from Callee's Audio DataStorage Area 20655b2a (Paragraph [0088]) (S1). CPU 211 then outputs thecaller's audio data from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequencedescribed in the present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0129]—This Paragraph [0129] illustrates Callee's Visual DataDisplaying Software 20655c10 stored in Caller's Information DisplayingSoftware Storage Area 20655c (Paragraph [0091]) of Caller's Device,which displays the callee's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) of Caller'sDevice. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Caller's Deviceretrieves the callee's visual data from Callee's Visual Data StorageArea 20655b2b (Paragraph [0088]) (S1). CPU 211 then displays thecallee's visual data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The sequence described inthe present paragraph is repeated periodically.

Paragraph [0130]—<<Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (ByPhone)>>

Paragraph [0131]—Paragraph [0132] through Paragraph [0155] illustratethe communication device remote controlling function (by phone) whichenables the user of Communication Device 200 to remotely controlCommunication Device 200 via conventional telephone Phone PH (notshown).

Paragraph [0132]—This Paragraph [0132] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Host H (Paragraph [0025]). In the present embodiment, Host Hincludes Communication Device Controlling Information Storage Area H57aof which the data and the software programs stored therein are describedin Paragraph [0133].

Paragraph [0133]—This Paragraph [0133] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Communication Device Controlling Information Storage AreaH57a (Paragraph [0132]). In the present embodiment, Communication DeviceControlling Information Storage Area H57a includes Communication DeviceControlling Data Storage Area H57b and Communication Device ControllingSoftware Storage Area H57c. Communication Device Controlling DataStorage Area H57b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Host H (Paragraph [0025]), such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0134] through Paragraph [0137]. CommunicationDevice Controlling Software Storage Area H57c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function on the side of HostH, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0138].

Paragraph [0134]—This Paragraph [0134] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area H57b(Paragraph [0133]). In the present embodiment, Communication DeviceControlling Data Storage Area H57b includes Password Data Storage AreaH57b1, Phone Number Data Storage Area H57b2, Audio Data Storage AreaH57b3, and Work Area H57b4. Password Data Storage Area H57b1 stores thedata described in Paragraph [0135]. Phone Number Data Storage Area H57b2stores the data described in Paragraph [0136]. Audio Data Storage AreaH57b3 stores the data described in Paragraph [0137]. Work Area H57b4 isutilized as a work area to perform calculation and to temporarily storedata.

Paragraph [0135]—This Paragraph [0135] illustrates the data stored inPassword Data Storage Area H57b1 (Paragraph [0134]). In the presentembodiment, Password Data Storage Area H57b1 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’. Column ‘User ID’ stores the userIDs, and each user ID represents the identification of the user ofCommunication Device 200. Column ‘Password Data’ stores the passworddata, and each password data represents the password set by the user ofthe corresponding user ID. Here, each password data is composed ofalphanumeric data. In the present embodiment, Password Data Storage AreaH57b1 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User#1’ and thecorresponding password data ‘Password Data#1’; the user ID ‘User#2’ andthe corresponding password data ‘Password Data#2’; the user ID ‘User#3’and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#3’; the user ID‘User#4’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#4’; and theuser ID ‘User#5’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#5’.

Paragraph [0136]—This Paragraph [0136] illustrates the data stored inPhone Number Data Storage Area H57b2 (Paragraph [0134]). In the presentembodiment, Phone Number Data Storage Area H57b2 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Phone Number Data’. Column ‘User ID’ stores theuser IDs, and each user ID represents the identification of the user ofCommunication Device 200. Column ‘Phone Number Data’ stores the phonenumber data, and each phone number data represents the phone number ofthe user of the corresponding user ID. Here, each phone number data iscomposed of numeric data. In the present embodiment, Phone Number DataStorage Area H57b2 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User#1’ andthe corresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data#1’; the user ID‘User#2’ and the corresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data#2’;the user ID ‘User#3’ and the corresponding phone number data ‘PhoneNumber Data#3’; the user ID ‘User#4’ and the corresponding phone numberdata ‘Phone Number Data#4’; and the user ID ‘User#5’ and thecorresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data#5’.

Paragraph [0137]—This Paragraph [0137] illustrates the data stored inAudio Data Storage Area H57b3 (Paragraph [0134]). In the presentembodiment, Audio Data Storage Area H57b3 comprises two columns, i.e.,‘Audio ID’ and ‘Audio Data’. Column ‘Audio ID’ stores the audio IDs, andeach audio ID represents the identification of the audio data stored incolumn ‘Audio Data’. Column ‘Audio Data’ stores the audio data, and eachaudio data represents a message output from a conventional telephonePhone PH. In the present embodiment, Audio Data Storage Area H57b3stores the following data: the audio ID ‘Audio#0’ and the correspondingaudio data ‘Audio Data#0’; the audio ID ‘Audio#1’ and the correspondingaudio data ‘Audio Data#1’; the audio ID ‘Audio#2’ and the correspondingaudio data ‘Audio Data#2’; the audio ID ‘Audio#3’ and the correspondingaudio data ‘Audio Data#3’; the audio ID ‘Audio#4’ and the correspondingaudio data ‘Audio Data#4’; the audio ID ‘Audio#5’ and the correspondingaudio data ‘Audio Data#5’; and the audio ID ‘Audio#6’ and thecorresponding audio data ‘Audio Data#6’. ‘Audio Data#0’ represents themessage: ‘To deactivate manner mode, press 1. To deactivate manner modeand ring your mobile phone, press 2. To ring your mobile phone, press 3.To change password of your mobile phone, press 4. To lock your mobilephone, press 5. To power off your mobile phone, press 6.’ ‘Audio Data#1’represents the message: ‘The manner mode has been deactivated.’ ‘AudioData#2’ represents the message: ‘The manner mode has been deactivatedand your mobile phone has been rung.’ ‘Audio Data#3’ represents themessage: ‘Your mobile phone has been rung.’ ‘Audio Data#4’ representsthe message: ‘The password of your mobile phone has been changed.’‘Audio Data#5’ represents the message: ‘Your mobile phone has beenchanged.’ ‘Audio Data#6’ represents the message: ‘Your mobile phone hasbeen power-offed.’ The foregoing audio data may be recorded in eithermale's voice or female's voice.

Paragraph [0138]—This Paragraph [0138] illustrates the software programsstored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H57c(Paragraph [0133]). In the present embodiment, Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area H57c stores User AuthenticatingSoftware H57c1, Menu Introducing Software H57c2, Line ConnectingSoftware H57c3, Manner Mode Deactivating Software H57c4, Manner ModeDeactivating & Ringing Software H57c5, Ringing Software H57c6, PasswordChanging Software H57c7, Device Locking Software H57c8, and Power OffSoftware H57c9. User Authenticating Software H57c1 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0147]. Menu Introducing Software H57c2is the software program described in Paragraph [0148]. Line ConnectingSoftware H57c3 is the software program described in Paragraph [0149].Manner Mode Deactivating Software H57c4 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0150]. Manner Mode Deactivating & RingingSoftware H57c5 is the software program described in Paragraph [0151].Ringing Software H57c6 is the software program described in Paragraph[0152]. Password Changing Software H57c7 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0153]. Device Locking Software H57c8 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0154]. Power Off Software H57c9is the software program described in Paragraph [0155].

Paragraph [0139]—This Paragraph [0139] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment, RAM 206includes Communication Device Controlling Information Storage Area20657a of which the data and the software programs stored therein aredescribed in Paragraph [0140].

Paragraph [0140]—This Paragraph [0140] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Communication Device Controlling Information Storage Area20657a (Paragraph [0139]). In the present embodiment, CommunicationDevice Controlling Information Storage Area 20657a includesCommunication Device Controlling Data Storage Area 20657b andCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20657c.Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area 20657b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function on the side ofCommunication Device 200, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0142]through Paragraph [0144]. Communication Device Controlling SoftwareStorage Area 20657c stores the software programs necessary to implementthe present function on the side of Communication Device 200, such asthe ones described in Paragraph [0145].

Paragraph [0141]—The data and/or the software programs stored inCommunication Device Controlling Information Storage Area 20657a(Paragraph [0140]) may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0142]—This Paragraph [0142] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area 20657b(Paragraph [0140]). In the present embodiment, Communication DeviceControlling Data Storage Area 20657b includes Password Data Storage Area20657b1 and Work Area 20657b4. Password Data Storage Area 20657b1 storesthe data described in Paragraph [0143]. Work Area 20657b4 is utilized asa work area to perform calculation and to temporarily store data.

Paragraph [0143]—This Paragraph [0143] illustrates the data stored inPassword Data Storage Area 20657b1 (Paragraph [0142]). In the presentembodiment, Password Data Storage Area 20657b1 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’. Column ‘User ID’ stores the user IDwhich represents the identification of the user of Communication Device200. Column ‘Password Data’ stores the password data set by the user ofCommunication Device 200. Here, the password data is composed ofalphanumeric data. Assuming that the user ID of Communication Device 200is ‘User#1’. In the present embodiment, Password Data Storage Area H57b1stores the following data: the user ID ‘User#1’ and the correspondingpassword data ‘Password Data#1’.

Paragraph [0144]—This Paragraph [0144] illustrates the data stored inPhone Number Data Storage Area 20657b2 (Paragraph [0142]). In thepresent embodiment, Phone Number Data Storage Area 20657b2 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Phone Number Data’. Column ‘User ID’stores the user ID of the user of Communication Device 200. Column‘Phone Number Data’ stores the phone number data which represents thephone number of Communication Device 200. Here, the phone number data iscomposed of numeric data. In the present embodiment, Phone Number DataStorage Area H57b2 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User#1’ andthe corresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data#1’.

Paragraph [0145]—This Paragraph [0145] illustrates the software programsstored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20657c(Paragraph [0140]). In the present embodiment, Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20657c stores Line Connecting Software20657c3, Manner Mode Deactivating Software 20657c4, Manner ModeDeactivating & Ringing Software 20657c5, Ringing Software 20657c6,Password Changing Software 20657c7, Device Locking Software 20657c8, andPower Off Software 20657c9. Line Connecting Software 20657c3 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0149]. Manner Mode DeactivatingSoftware 20657c4 is the software program described in Paragraph [0150].Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20657c5 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0151]. Ringing Software 20657c6 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0152]. Password ChangingSoftware 20657c7 is the software program described in Paragraph [0153].Device Locking Software 20657c8 is the software program described inParagraph [0154]. Power Off Software 20657c9 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0155].

Paragraph [0146]—Paragraph [0147] through Paragraph [0155] illustratethe software programs which enables the user of Communication Device 200to remotely control Communication Device 200 via conventional telephonePhone PH.

Paragraph [0147]—This Paragraph [0147] illustrates User AuthenticatingSoftware H57c1 (Paragraph [0138]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area H57c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]),which authenticates the user of Communication Device 200 to implementthe present function via Phone PH. In the present embodiment, Phone PHcalls Host H by dialing the predetermined phone number of Host H (S1).Upon receiving the call from Phone PH (S2) and the line is connectedtherebetween (S3), the user, by utilizing Phone PH, inputs both his/herpassword data (S4) and the phone number data of Communication Device 200(S5). Host H initiates the authentication process by referring toPassword Data Storage Area H57b1 (Paragraph [0135]) and Phone NumberData Storage Area H57b2 (Paragraph [0136])) (S6). The authenticationprocess is completed (and the sequences described hereafter are enabledthereafter) if the password data and the phone number data described inS4 and S5 match with the data stored in Password Data Storage Area H57b1and Phone Number Data Storage Area H57b2.

Paragraph [0148]—This Paragraph [0148] illustrates Menu IntroducingSoftware H57c2 (Paragraph [0138]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area H57c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]),which introduces the menu via Phone PH. In the present embodiment, HostH retrieves Audio Data#0 from Audio Data Storage Area H57b3 (Paragraph[0137]) (S1), and sends the data to Phone PH (S2). Upon receiving AudioData#0 from Host H (S3), Phone PH outputs Audio Data#0 from its speaker(S4). The user presses one of the keys of ‘1’ through ‘6’ wherein thesequences implemented thereafter are described in Paragraph [0149]through Paragraph [0155] (S5).

Paragraph [0149]—This Paragraph [0149] illustrates Line ConnectingSoftware H57c3 (Paragraph [0138]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area H57c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andLine Connecting Software 20657c3 (Paragraph [0145]) stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20657c ofCommunication Device 200, which connect line between Host H andCommunication Device 200. In the present embodiment, Host H callsCommunication Device 200 by retrieving the corresponding phone numberdata from Phone Number Data Storage Area H57b2 (Paragraph [0136]) (S1).Upon Communication Device 200 receiving the call from Host H (S2), theline is connected therebetween (S3). For the avoidance of doubt, theline is connected between Host H and Communication Device 200 merely toimplement the present function, and a voice communication between humanbeings is not enabled thereafter.

Paragraph [0150]—This Paragraph [0150] illustrates Manner ModeDeactivating Software H57c4 (Paragraph [0138]) stored in CommunicationDevice Controlling Software Storage Area H57c of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and Manner Mode Deactivating Software 20657c4 (Paragraph [0145])stored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20657cof Communication Device 200, which deactivate the manner mode ofCommunication Device 200. Here, Communication Device 200 activatesVibrator 217 (FIG. 1) when Communication Device 200 is in the mannermode and outputs a ringing sound from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) whenCommunication Device 200 is not in the manner mode, upon receiving anincoming call. Assume that the user presses key ‘1’ of Phone PH (S1). Inresponse, Phone PH sends the corresponding signal to Host H (S2). HostH, upon receiving the signal described in S2, sends a manner modedeactivating command to Communication Device 200 (S3). Upon receivingthe manner mode deactivating command from Host H (S4), CommunicationDevice 200 deactivates the manner mode (S5). Host H retrieves AudioData#1 from Audio Data Storage Area H57b3 (Paragraph [0137]) and sendsthe data to Phone PH (S6). Upon receiving Audio Data#1 from Host H,Phone PH outputs the data from its speaker (S7). Normally the purpose tooutput the ringing sound from Speaker 216 is to give a notification tothe user that Communication Device 200 has received an incoming call,and a voice communication is enabled thereafter upon answering the call.In contrast, the purpose to output the ringing sound from Speaker 216 byexecuting Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software H57c5 and MannerMode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20657c5 is merely to let the userto identify the location of Communication Device 200. Therefore, a voicecommunication between human beings is not enabled thereafter.

Paragraph [0151]—This Paragraph [0151] illustrates Manner ModeDeactivating & Ringing Software H57c5 (Paragraph [0138]) stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H57c of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software20657c5 (Paragraph [0145]) stored in Communication Device ControllingSoftware Storage Area 20657c of Communication Device 200, whichdeactivate the manner mode of Communication Device 200 and outputs aringing sound thereafter. Assume that the user presses key ‘2’ of PhonePH (S1). In response, Phone PH sends the corresponding signal to Host H(S2). Host H, upon receiving the signal described in S2, sends a mannermode deactivating & device ringing command to Communication Device 200(S3). Upon receiving the manner mode deactivating & device ringingcommand from Host H (S4), Communication Device 200 deactivates themanner mode (S5) and outputs a ring data from Speaker 216 (S6). Host Hretrieves Audio Data#2 from Audio Data Storage Area H57b3 (Paragraph[0137]) and sends the data to Phone PH (S7). Upon receiving Audio Data#2from Host H, Phone PH outputs the data from its speaker (S8). Normallythe purpose to output the ringing sound from Speaker 216 is to give anotification to the user that Communication Device 200 has received anincoming call, and a voice communication is enabled thereafter uponanswering the call. In contrast, the purpose to output the ringing soundfrom Speaker 216 by executing Manner Mode Deactivating & RingingSoftware H57c5 and Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20657c5is merely to let the user to identify the location of CommunicationDevice 200. Therefore, a voice communication between human beings is notenabled thereafter by implementing the present function.

Paragraph [0152]—This Paragraph [0152] illustrates Ringing SoftwareH57c6 (Paragraph [0138]) stored in Communication Device ControllingSoftware Storage Area H57c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and RingingSoftware 20657c6 (Paragraph [0145]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20657c of Communication Device 200,which output a ringing sound from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1). Assume that theuser presses key ‘3’ of Phone PH (S1). In response, Phone PH sends thecorresponding signal to Host H (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signaldescribed in S2, sends a device ringing command to Communication Device200 (S3). Upon receiving the device ringing command from Host H (S4),Communication Device 200 outputs a ring data from Speaker 216 (S5). HostH retrieves Audio Data#3 from Audio Data Storage Area H57b3 (Paragraph[0137]) and sends the data to Phone PH (S6). Upon receiving Audio Data#3from Host H, Phone PH outputs the data from its speaker (S7). Normallythe purpose to output the ringing sound from Speaker 216 is to give anotification to the user that Communication Device 200 has received anincoming call, and a voice communication is enabled thereafter uponanswering the call. In contrast, the purpose to output the ringing soundfrom Speaker 216 by executing Ringing Software H57c6 and RingingSoftware 20657c6 is merely to let the user to identify the location ofCommunication Device 200. Therefore, a voice communication between humanbeings is not enabled thereafter by implementing the present function.

Paragraph [0153]—This Paragraph [0153] illustrates Password ChangingSoftware H57c7 (Paragraph [0138]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area H57c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andPassword Changing Software 20657c7 (Paragraph [0145]) stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20657c ofCommunication Device 200, which change the password necessary to operateCommunication Device 200. Assume that the user presses key ‘4’ of PhonePH (S1). In response, Phone PH sends the corresponding signal to Host H(S2). The user then enters a new password data by utilizing Phone PH(S3), which is sent to Communication Device 200 by Host H (S4). Uponreceiving the new password data from Host H (S5), Communication Device200 stores the new password data in Password Data Storage Area 20657b1(Paragraph [0143]) and the old password data is erased (S6). Host Hretrieves Audio Data#4 from Audio Data Storage Area H57b3 (Paragraph[0137]) and sends the data to Phone PH (S7). Upon receiving Audio Data#4from Host H, Phone PH outputs the data from its speaker (S8).

Paragraph [0154]—This Paragraph [0154] illustrates Device LockingSoftware H57c8 (Paragraph [0138]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area H57c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andDevice Locking Software 20657c8 (Paragraph [0145]) stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20657c ofCommunication Device 200, which lock Communication Device 200, i.e.,nullify any input signal input via Input Device 210 (FIG. 1). Assumethat the user presses key ‘5’ of Phone PH (S1). In response, Phone PHsends the corresponding signal to Host H (S2). Host H, upon receivingthe signal described in S2, sends a device locking command toCommunication Device 200 (S3). Upon receiving the device locking commandfrom Host H (S4), Communication Device 200 is locked thereafter, i.e.,any input via Input Device 210 is nullified unless a password datamatching to the one stored in Password Data Storage Area 20657b1(Paragraph [0143]) is entered (S5). Host H retrieves Audio Data#5 fromAudio Data Storage Area H57b3 (Paragraph [0137]) and sends the data toPhone PH (S6). Upon receiving Audio Data#5 from Host H, Phone PH outputsthe data from its speaker (S7).

Paragraph [0155]—This Paragraph [0155] illustrates Power Off SoftwareH57c9 (Paragraph [0138]) stored in Communication Device ControllingSoftware Storage Area H57c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Power OffSoftware 20657c9 (Paragraph [0145]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20657c of Communication Device 200,which turn off the power of Communication Device 200. Assume that theuser presses key ‘6’ of Phone PH (S1). In response, Phone PH sends thecorresponding signal to Host H (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signaldescribed in S2, sends a power off command to Communication Device 200(S3). Upon receiving the power off command from Host H (S4),Communication Device 200 turns off the power of itself (S5). Host Hretrieves Audio Data#6 from Audio Data Storage Area H57b3 (Paragraph[0137]) and sends the data to Phone PH (S6). Upon receiving Audio Data#6from Host H, Phone PH outputs the data from its speaker (S7).

Paragraph [0156]—<<Communication Device Remote Controlling Function (ByWeb)>>

Paragraph [0157]—Paragraph [0158] through Paragraph [0181] illustratethe communication device remote controlling function (by web) whichenables the user of Communication Device 200 to remotely controlCommunication Device 200 by an ordinary personal computer (PersonalComputer PC) via the Internet, i.e., by accessing a certain web site.Here, Personal Computer PC may be any type of personal computer,including a desktop computer, lap top computer, and PDA.

Paragraph [0158]—This Paragraph [0158] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Host H (Paragraph [0025]). In the present embodiment, Host Hincludes Communication Device Controlling Information Storage Area H58aof which the data and the software programs stored therein are describedin Paragraph [0159].

Paragraph [0159]—This Paragraph [0159] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Communication Device Controlling Information Storage AreaH58a (Paragraph [0158]). In the present embodiment, Communication DeviceControlling Information Storage Area H58a includes Communication DeviceControlling Data Storage Area H58b and Communication Device ControllingSoftware Storage Area H58c. Communication Device Controlling DataStorage Area H58b stores the data necessary to implement the presentfunction on the side of Host H (Paragraph [0025]), such as the onesdescribed in Paragraph [0160] through Paragraph [0163]. CommunicationDevice Controlling Software Storage Area H58c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function on the side of HostH, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0164].

Paragraph [0160]—This Paragraph [0160] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area H58b(Paragraph [0159]). In the present embodiment, Communication DeviceControlling Data Storage Area H58b includes Password Data Storage AreaH58b1, Phone Number Data Storage Area H58b2, Web Display Data StorageArea H58b3, and Work Area H58b4. Password Data Storage Area H58b1 storesthe data described in Paragraph [0161]. Phone Number Data Storage AreaH58b2 stores the data described in Paragraph [0162]. Web Display DataStorage Area H58b3 stores the data described in Paragraph [0163]. WorkArea H58b4 is utilized as a work area to perform calculation and totemporarily store data.

Paragraph [0161]—This Paragraph [0161] illustrates the data stored inPassword Data Storage Area H58b1 (Paragraph [0160]). In the presentembodiment, Password Data Storage Area H58b1 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’. Column ‘User ID’ stores the userIDs, and each user ID represents the identification of the user ofCommunication Device 200. Column ‘Password Data’ stores the passworddata, and each password data represents the password set by the user ofthe corresponding user ID. Here, each password data is composed ofalphanumeric data. In the present embodiment, Password Data Storage AreaH58b1 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User#1’ and thecorresponding password data ‘Password Data#1’; the user ID ‘User#2’ andthe corresponding password data ‘Password Data#2’; the user ID ‘User#3’and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#3’; the user ID‘User#4’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#4’; and theuser ID ‘User#5’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#5’.

Paragraph [0162]—This Paragraph [0162] illustrates the data stored inPhone Number Data Storage Area H58b2 (Paragraph [0160]). In the presentembodiment, Phone Number Data Storage Area H58b2 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Phone Number Data’. Column ‘User ID’ stores theuser IDs, and each user ID represents the identification of the user ofCommunication Device 200. Column ‘Phone Number Data’ stores the phonenumber data, and each phone number data represents the phone number ofthe user of the corresponding user ID. Here, each phone number data iscomposed of numeric data. In the present embodiment, Phone Number DataStorage Area H58b2 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User#1’ andthe corresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data#1’; the user ID‘User#2’ and the corresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data#2’;the user ID ‘User#3’ and the corresponding phone number data ‘PhoneNumber Data#3’; the user ID ‘User#4’ and the corresponding phone numberdata ‘Phone Number Data#4’; and the user ID ‘User#5’ and thecorresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data#5’.

Paragraph [0163]—This Paragraph [0163] illustrates the data stored inWeb Display Data Storage Area H58b3 (Paragraph [0160]). In the presentembodiment, Web Display Data Storage Area H58b3 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘Web Display ID’ and ‘Web Display Data’. Column ‘Web Display ID’stores the web display IDs, and each web display ID represents theidentification of the web display data stored in column ‘Web DisplayData’. Column ‘Web Display Data’ stores the web display data, and eachweb display data represents a message displayed on Personal Computer PC.In the present embodiment, Web Display Data Storage Area H58b3 storesthe following data: the web display ID ‘Web Display#0’ and thecorresponding web display data ‘Web Display Data#0’; the web display ID‘Web Display#1’ and the corresponding web display data ‘Web DisplayData#1’; the web display ID ‘Web Display#2’ and the corresponding webdisplay data ‘Web Display Data#2’; the web display ID ‘Web Display#3’and the corresponding web display data ‘Web Display Data#3’; the webdisplay ID ‘Web Display#4’ and the corresponding web display data ‘WebDisplay Data#4’; the web display ID ‘Web Display#5’ and thecorresponding web display data ‘Web Display Data#5’; and the web displayID ‘Web Display#6’ and the corresponding web display data ‘Web DisplayData#6’. ‘Web Display Data#0’ represents the message: ‘To deactivatemanner mode, press 1. To deactivate manner mode and ring your mobilephone, press 2. To ring your mobile phone, press 3. To change passwordof your mobile phone, press 4. To lock your mobile phone, press 5. Topower off your mobile phone, press 6.’ ‘Web Display Data#1’ representsthe message: ‘The manner mode has been deactivated.’ ‘Web DisplayData#2’ represents the message: ‘The manner mode has been deactivatedand your mobile phone has been rung.’ ‘Web Display Data#3’ representsthe message: ‘Your mobile phone has been rung.’ ‘Web Display Data#4’represents the message: ‘The password of your mobile phone has beenchanged.’ ‘Web Display Data#5’ represents the message: ‘Your mobilephone has been changed.’ ‘Web Display Data#6’ represents the message:‘Your mobile phone has been power-offed.’ Paragraph [0163] a illustratesthe display of Personal Computer PC. In the present embodiment, HomePage 20158HP, i.e., a home page to implement the present function isdisplayed on Personal Computer PC. Home Page 20158HP is primarilycomposed of Web Display Data#0 (Paragraph [0163]) and six buttons, i.e.,Buttons 1 through 6. Following the instruction described in Web DisplayData#0, the user may select one of the buttons to implement the desiredfunction as described hereinafter.

Paragraph [0164]—This Paragraph [0164] illustrates the software programsstored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58c(Paragraph [0159]). In the present embodiment, Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area H58c stores User AuthenticatingSoftware H58c1, Menu Introducing Software H58c2, Line ConnectingSoftware H58c3, Manner Mode Deactivating Software H58c4, Manner ModeDeactivating & Ringing Software H58c5, Ringing Software H58c6, PasswordChanging Software H58c7, Device Locking Software H58c8, and Power OffSoftware H58c9. User Authenticating Software H58c1 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0173]. Menu Introducing Software H58c2is the software program described in Paragraph [0174]. Line ConnectingSoftware H58c3 is the software program described in Paragraph [0175].Manner Mode Deactivating Software H58c4 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0176]. Manner Mode Deactivating & RingingSoftware H58c5 is the software program described in Paragraph [0177].Ringing Software H58c6 is the software program described in Paragraph[0178]. Password Changing Software H58c7 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0179]. Device Locking Software H58c8 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0180]. Power Off Software H58c9is the software program described in Paragraph [0181].

Paragraph [0165]—This Paragraph [0165] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment, RAM 206includes Communication Device Controlling Information Storage Area20658a of which the data and the software programs stored therein aredescribed in Paragraph [0166].

Paragraph [0166]—This Paragraph [0166] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Communication Device Controlling Information Storage Area20658a (Paragraph [0165]). In the present embodiment, CommunicationDevice Controlling Information Storage Area 20658a includesCommunication Device Controlling Data Storage Area 20658b andCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658c.Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area 20658b stores thedata necessary to implement the present function on the side ofCommunication Device 200, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0168]through Paragraph [0170]. Communication Device Controlling SoftwareStorage Area 20658c stores the software programs necessary to implementthe present function on the side of Communication Device 200, such asthe ones described in Paragraph [0171].

Paragraph [0167]—The data and/or the software programs stored inCommunication Device Controlling Information Storage Area 20658a(Paragraph [0166]) may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0168]—This Paragraph [0168] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Communication Device Controlling Data Storage Area 20658b(Paragraph [0166]). In the present embodiment, Communication DeviceControlling Data Storage Area 20658b includes Password Data Storage Area20658b1 and Work Area 20658b4. Password Data Storage Area 20658b1 storesthe data described in Paragraph [0169]. Work Area 20658b4 is utilized asa work area to perform calculation and to temporarily store data.

Paragraph [0169]—This Paragraph [0169] illustrates the data stored inPassword Data Storage Area 20658b1 (Paragraph [0168]). In the presentembodiment, Password Data Storage Area 20658b1 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’. Column ‘User ID’ stores the user IDwhich represents the identification of the user of Communication Device200. Column ‘Password Data’ stores the password data set by the user ofCommunication Device 200. Here, the password data is composed ofalphanumeric data. Assuming that the user ID of Communication Device 200is ‘User#1’. In the present embodiment, Password Data Storage Area H58b1stores the following data: the user ID ‘User#1’ and the correspondingpassword data ‘Password Data#1’.

Paragraph [0170]—This Paragraph [0170] illustrates the data stored inPhone Number Data Storage Area 20658b2 (Paragraph [0168]). In thepresent embodiment, Phone Number Data Storage Area 20658b2 comprises twocolumns, i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Phone Number Data’. Column ‘User ID’stores the user ID of the user of Communication Device 200. Column‘Phone Number Data’ stores the phone number data which represents thephone number of Communication Device 200. Here, the phone number data iscomposed of numeric data. In the present embodiment, Phone Number DataStorage Area H58b2 stores the following data: the user ID ‘User#1’ andthe corresponding phone number data ‘Phone Number Data#1’.

Paragraph [0171]—This Paragraph [0171] illustrates the software programsstored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658c(Paragraph [0166]). In the present embodiment, Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20658c stores Line Connecting Software20658c3, Manner Mode Deactivating Software 20658c4, Manner ModeDeactivating & Ringing Software 20658c5, Ringing Software 20658c6,Password Changing Software 20658c7, Device Locking Software 20658c8, andPower Off Software 20658c9. Line Connecting Software 20658c3 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0175]. Manner Mode DeactivatingSoftware 20658c4 is the software program described in Paragraph [0176].Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20658c5 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0177]. Ringing Software 20658c6 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0178]. Password ChangingSoftware 20658c7 is the software program described in Paragraph [0179].Device Locking Software 20658c8 is the software program described inParagraph [0180]. Power Off Software 20658c9 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0181].

Paragraph [0172]—Paragraph [0173] through Paragraph [0181] illustratethe software programs which enables the user of Communication Device 200to remotely control Communication Device 200 by Personal Computer PC.

Paragraph [0173]—This Paragraph [0173] illustrates User AuthenticatingSoftware H58c1 (Paragraph [0164]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area H58c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]),which authenticates the user of Communication Device 200 to implementthe present function via Personal Computer PC. In the presentembodiment, Personal Computer PC sends an access request to Host H viathe Internet (S1). Upon receiving the request from Personal Computer PC(S2) and the line is connected therebetween (S3), the user, by utilizingPersonal Computer PC, inputs both his/her password data (S4) and thephone number data of Communication Device 200 (S5). Host H initiates theauthentication process by referring to Password Data Storage Area H58b1(Paragraph [0161]) and Phone Number Data Storage Area H58b2 (Paragraph[0162])) (S6). The authentication process is completed (and thesequences described hereafter are enabled thereafter) if the passworddata and the phone number data described in S4 and S5 match with thedata stored in Password Data Storage Area H58b1 and Phone Number DataStorage Area H58b2.

Paragraph [0174]—This Paragraph [0174] illustrates Menu IntroducingSoftware H58c2 (Paragraph [0164]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area H58c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]),which introduces the menu on Personal Computer PC. In the presentembodiment, Host H retrieves Web Display Data#0 from Web Display DataStorage Area H58b3 (Paragraph [0163]) (S1), and sends the data toPersonal Computer PC (S2). Upon receiving Web Display Data#0 from Host H(S3), Personal Computer PC displays Web Display Data#0 on its display(S4). The user selects from one of the buttons of ‘1’ through ‘6’wherein the sequences implemented thereafter are described in Paragraph[0175] through Paragraph [0181] (S5).

Paragraph [0175]—This Paragraph [0175] illustrates Line ConnectingSoftware H58c3 (Paragraph [0164]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area H58c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andLine Connecting Software 20658c3 (Paragraph [0171]) stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658c ofCommunication Device 200, which connect line between Host H andCommunication Device 200. In the present embodiment, Host H callsCommunication Device 200 by retrieving the corresponding phone numberdata from Phone Number Data Storage Area H58b2 (Paragraph [0162]) (S1).Upon Communication Device 200 receiving the call from Host H (S2), theline is connected therebetween (S3). For the avoidance of doubt, theline is connected between Host H and Communication Device 200 merely toimplement the present function, and a voice communication between humanbeings is not enabled thereafter.

Paragraph [0176]—This Paragraph [0176] illustrates Manner ModeDeactivating Software H58c4 (Paragraph [0164]) stored in CommunicationDevice Controlling Software Storage Area H58c of Host H (Paragraph[0025]) and Manner Mode Deactivating Software 20658c4 (Paragraph [0171])stored in Communication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658cof Communication Device 200, which deactivate the manner mode ofCommunication Device 200. Here, Communication Device 200 activatesVibrator 217 (FIG. 1) when Communication Device 200 is in the mannermode and outputs a ringing sound from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1) whenCommunication Device 200 is not in the manner mode, upon receiving anincoming call. Assume that the user selects button ‘1’ displayed onPersonal Computer PC (S1). In response, Personal Computer PC sends thecorresponding signal to Host H via the Internet (S2). Host H, uponreceiving the signal described in S2, sends a manner mode deactivatingcommand to Communication Device 200 (S3). Upon receiving the manner modedeactivating command from Host H (S4), Communication Device 200deactivates the manner mode (S5). Host H retrieves Web Display Data#1from Web Display Data Storage Area H58b3 (Paragraph [0163]) and sendsthe data to Personal Computer PC (S6). Upon receiving Web Display Data#1from Host H, Personal Computer PC displays the data (S7). Normally thepurpose to output the ringing sound from Speaker 216 is to give anotification to the user that Communication Device 200 has received anincoming call, and a voice communication is enabled thereafter uponanswering the call. In contrast, the purpose to output the ringing soundfrom Speaker 216 by executing Manner Mode Deactivating & RingingSoftware H58c5 and Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software 20658c5is merely to let the user to identify the location of CommunicationDevice 200. Therefore, a voice communication between human beings is notenabled thereafter.

Paragraph [0177]—This Paragraph [0177] illustrates Manner ModeDeactivating & Ringing Software H58c5 (Paragraph [0164]) stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area H58c of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software20658c5 (Paragraph [0171]) stored in Communication Device ControllingSoftware Storage Area 20658c of Communication Device 200, whichdeactivate the manner mode of Communication Device 200 and outputs aringing sound thereafter. Assume that the user selects button ‘2’displayed on Personal Computer PC (S1). In response, Personal ComputerPC sends the corresponding signal to Host H via the Internet (S2). HostH, upon receiving the signal described in S2, sends a manner modedeactivating & device ringing command to Communication Device 200 (S3).Upon receiving the manner mode deactivating & device ringing commandfrom Host H (S4), Communication Device 200 deactivates the manner mode(S5) and outputs a ring data from Speaker 216 (S6). Host H retrieves WebDisplay Data#2 from Web Display Data Storage Area H58b3 (Paragraph[0163]) and sends the data to Personal Computer PC (S7). Upon receivingWeb Display Data#2 from Host H, Personal Computer PC displays the data(S8). Normally the purpose to output the ringing sound from Speaker 216is to give a notification to the user that Communication Device 200 hasreceived an incoming call, and a voice communication is enabledthereafter upon answering the call. In contrast, the purpose to outputthe ringing sound from Speaker 216 by executing Manner Mode Deactivating& Ringing Software H58c5 and Manner Mode Deactivating & Ringing Software20658c5 is merely to let the user to identify the location ofCommunication Device 200. Therefore, a voice communication between humanbeings is not enabled thereafter by implementing the present function.

Paragraph [0178]—This Paragraph [0178] illustrates Ringing SoftwareH58c6 (Paragraph [0164]) stored in Communication Device ControllingSoftware Storage Area H58c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and RingingSoftware 20658c6 (Paragraph [0171]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20658c of Communication Device 200,which output a ringing sound from Speaker 216 (FIG. 1). Assume that theuser selects button ‘3’ displayed on Personal Computer PC (S1). Inresponse, Personal Computer PC sends the corresponding signal to Host Hvia the Internet (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signal described inS2, sends a device ringing command to Communication Device 200 (S3).Upon receiving the device ringing command from Host H (S4),Communication Device 200 outputs a ring data from Speaker 216 (S5). HostH retrieves Web Display Data#3 from Web Display Data Storage Area H58b3(Paragraph [0163]) and sends the data to Personal Computer PC (S6). Uponreceiving Web Display Data#3 from Host H, Personal Computer PC displaysthe data (S7). Normally the purpose to output the ringing sound fromSpeaker 216 is to give a notification to the user that CommunicationDevice 200 has received an incoming call, and a voice communication isenabled thereafter upon answering the call. In contrast, the purpose tooutput the ringing sound from Speaker 216 by executing Ringing SoftwareH58c6 and Ringing Software 20658c6 is merely to let the user to identifythe location of Communication Device 200. Therefore, a voicecommunication between human beings is not enabled thereafter byimplementing the present function.

Paragraph [0179]—This Paragraph [0179] illustrates Password ChangingSoftware H58c7 (Paragraph [0164]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area H58c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andPassword Changing Software 20658c7 (Paragraph [0171]) stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658c ofCommunication Device 200, which change the password necessary to operateCommunication Device 200. Assume that the user selects button ‘4’displayed on Personal Computer PC (S1). In response, Personal ComputerPC sends the corresponding signal to Host H via the Internet (S2). Theuser then enters a new password data by utilizing Personal Computer PC(S3), which is sent to Communication Device 200 by Host H (S4). Uponreceiving the new password data from Host H (S5), Communication Device200 stores the new password data in Password Data Storage Area 20658b1(Paragraph [0169]) and the old password data is erased (S6). Host Hretrieves Web Display Data#4 from Web Display Data Storage Area H58b3(Paragraph [0163]) and sends the data to Personal Computer PC (S7). Uponreceiving Web Display Data#4 from Host H, Personal Computer PC displaysthe data (S8).

Paragraph [0180]—This Paragraph [0180] illustrates Device LockingSoftware H58c8 (Paragraph [0164]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area H58c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) andDevice Locking Software 20658c8 (Paragraph [0171]) stored inCommunication Device Controlling Software Storage Area 20658c ofCommunication Device 200, which lock Communication Device 200, i.e.,nullify any input signal input via Input Device 210 (FIG. 1). Assumethat the user selects button's′ displayed on Personal Computer PC (S1).In response, Personal Computer PC sends the corresponding signal to HostH via the Internet (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signal described inS2, sends a device locking command to Communication Device 200 (S3).Upon receiving the device locking command from Host H (S4),Communication Device 200 is locked thereafter, i.e., any input via InputDevice 210 is nullified unless a password data matching to the onestored in Password Data Storage Area 20658b1 (Paragraph [0169]) isentered (S5). Host H retrieves Web Display Data#5 from Web Display DataStorage Area H58b3 (Paragraph [0163]) and sends the data to PersonalComputer PC (S6). Upon receiving Web Display Data#5 from Host H,Personal Computer PC displays the data (S7).

Paragraph [0181]—This Paragraph [0181] illustrates Power Off SoftwareH58c9 (Paragraph [0164]) stored in Communication Device ControllingSoftware Storage Area H58c of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Power OffSoftware 20658c9 (Paragraph [0171]) stored in Communication DeviceControlling Software Storage Area 20658c of Communication Device 200,which turn off the power of Communication Device 200. Assume that theuser selects button ‘6’ displayed on Personal Computer PC (S1). Inresponse, Personal Computer PC sends the corresponding signal to Host Hvia the Internet (S2). Host H, upon receiving the signal described inS2, sends a power off command to Communication Device 200 (S3). Uponreceiving the power off command from Host H (S4), Communication Device200 turns off the power of itself (S5). Host H retrieves Web DisplayData#6 from Web Display Data Storage Area H58b3 (Paragraph [0163]) andsends the data to Personal Computer PC (S6). Upon receiving Web DisplayData#6 from Host H, Personal Computer PC displays the data (S7).

Paragraph [0182]—<<OS Updating Function>>

Paragraph [0183]—Paragraph [0184] through Paragraph [0244] illustratethe OS updating function which updates the operating system ofCommunication Device 200 in a wireless fashion. In other words,Communication Device 200 downloads the portion of the operating systemof the latest version from Host H (Paragraph [0025]) via Antenna 218(FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0184]—This Paragraph [0184] illustrates the storage areasincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1). In the present embodiment, RAM 206includes Operating System 20663OS of which the data stored therein aredescribed in Paragraph [0185], and OS Updating Information Storage Area20663a of which the data and the software programs stored therein aredescribed in Paragraph [0186].

Paragraph [0185]—This Paragraph [0185] illustrates the data stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0184]). In the present embodiment,Operating System 20663OS includes Battery Controller 20663OSa, CCD UnitController 20663OSb, Flash Light Unit Controller 20663OSc, IndicatorController 20663OSd, Input Device Controller 20663OSe, LCD Controller20663OSf, LED Controller 20663OSg, Memory Card Interface Controller20663OSh, Microphone Controller 20663OSi, Photometer Controller20663OSj, RAM Controller 20663OSk, ROM Controller 20663OSl, SignalProcessor Controller 20663OSm, Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn,Solar Panel Controller 20663OSo, Speaker Controller 20663OSp, VibratorController 20663OSq, Video Processor Controller 20663OSr, WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSs, Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt,Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu, Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSv, Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw, and WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSx. Battery Controller 20663OSa is acontroller which controls Battery 230 (not shown). CCD Unit Controller20663OSb is a controller which controls CCD Unit 214 (not shown). FlashLight Unit Controller 206639OSc is a controller which controls FlashLight Unit 220 (not shown). Indicator Controller 20663OSd is acontroller which controls Indicator 212 (not shown). Input DeviceController 20663OSe is a controller which controls Input Device 210 (notshown). LCD Controller 20663OSf is a controller which controls LCD 201(not shown). LED Controller 20663OSg is a controller which controls LED219 (not shown). Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh is acontroller which controls Memory Card Interface 221 (not shown).Microphone Controller 20663OSi is a controller which controls Microphone215 (not shown). Photometer Controller 20663OSj is a controller whichcontrols Photometer 232 (not shown). RAM Controller 20663OSk is acontroller which controls RAM 206 (not shown). ROM Controller 20663OSlis a controller which controls ROM 207 (not shown). Signal ProcessorController 20663OSm is a controller which controls Signal Processor 205(not shown). Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn is a controller whichcontrols Signal Processor 208 (not shown). Solar Panel Controller20663OSo is a controller which controls Solar Panel 229 (not shown).Speaker Controller 20663OSp is a controller which controls Speaker 216L(not shown). Vibrator Controller 20663OSq is a controller which controlsVibrator 217 (not shown). Video Processor Controller 20663OSr is acontroller which controls Video Processor 202 (not shown). WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSs is a controller which controls WirelessReceiver 224 (not shown). Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt is acontroller which controls Wireless Receiver 225 (not shown). WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSu is a controller which controls WirelessReceiver 226 (not shown). Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv is acontroller which controls Wireless Transmitter 222 (not shown). WirelessTransmitter Controller 20663OSw is a controller which controls WirelessTransmitter 223 (not shown). Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx isa controller which controls Wireless Transmitter 227 (not shown). Forthe avoidance of doubt, the data stored in Operating System 20663OS areillustrative, and other types of data, which are updated by implementingthe present function, are also stored therein, such as DLLs, drivers,security implementing program.

Paragraph [0186]—This Paragraph [0186] illustrates the storage areasincluded in OS Updating Information Storage Area 20663a (Paragraph[0184]). In the present embodiment, OS Updating Information Storage Area20663a includes OS Updating Data Storage Area 20663b and OS UpdatingSoftware Storage Area 20663c. OS Updating Data Storage Area 20663bstores the data necessary to implement the present function on the sideof Communication Device 200, such as the ones described in Paragraph[0188]. OS Updating Software Storage Area 20663c stores the softwareprograms necessary to implement the present function on the side ofCommunication Device 200, such as the ones described in Paragraph[0190].

Paragraph [0187]—The data and/or the software programs stored in OSUpdating Software Storage Area 20663c (Paragraph [0186]) may bedownloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0188]—This Paragraph [0188] illustrates the storage areaincluded in OS Updating Data Storage Area 20663b (Paragraph [0186]). Inthe present embodiment, OS Updating Data Storage Area 20663b includes OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1. OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1stores the data described in Paragraph [0189].

Paragraph [0189]—This Paragraph [0189] illustrates the data stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0188]). In the presentembodiment, OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 includes BatteryController Version Data 20663b1a, CCD Unit Controller Version Data20663b1b, Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1c, IndicatorController Version Data 20663b1d, Input Device Controller Version Data20663b1e, LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f, LED Controller VersionData 20663b1g, Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663b1h,Microphone Controller Version Data 20663b1i, Photometer ControllerVersion Data 20663b1j, RAM Controller Version Data 20663b1k, ROMController Version Data 20663b1l, Signal Processor Controller VersionData 20663b1m, Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1n, SolarPanel Controller Version Data 20663b1o, Speaker Controller Version Data20663b1p, Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q, Video ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1r, Wireless Receiver Controller VersionData 20663b1s, Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t,Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u, Wireless TransmitterController Version Data 20663b1v, Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data 20663b1w, and Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663b1x. Battery Controller Version Data 20663b1a is the version datarepresenting the current version of Battery Controller 20663OSa(Paragraph [0185]). CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b is theversion data representing the current version of CCD Unit Controller20663OSb (Paragraph [0185]). Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data20663b1c is the version data representing the current version of FlashLight Unit Controller 206639OSc (Paragraph [0185]). Indicator ControllerVersion Data 20663b1d is the version data representing the currentversion of Indicator Controller 20663OSd (Paragraph [0185]). InputDevice Controller Version Data 20663b1e is the version data representingthe current version of Input Device Controller 20663OSe (Paragraph[0185]). LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f is the version datarepresenting the current version of LCD Controller 20663OSf (Paragraph[0185]). LED Controller Version Data 20663b1g is the version datarepresenting the current version of LED Controller 20663OSg (Paragraph[0185]). Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663b1h is theversion data representing the current version of Memory Card InterfaceController 20663OSh (Paragraph [0185]). Microphone Controller VersionData 20663b1i is the version data representing the current version ofMicrophone Controller 20663OSi (Paragraph [0185]). Photometer ControllerVersion Data 20663b1j is the version data representing the currentversion of Photometer Controller 20663OSj (Paragraph [0185]). RAMController Version Data 20663b1k is the version data representing thecurrent version of RAM Controller 20663OSk (Paragraph [0185]). ROMController Version Data 20663b1l is the version data representing thecurrent version of ROM Controller 20663OSl (Paragraph [0185]). SignalProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1m is the version datarepresenting the current version of Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm(Paragraph [0185]). Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1n isthe version data representing the current version of Signal ProcessorController 20663OSn (Paragraph [0185]). Solar Panel Controller VersionData 20663b1o is the version data representing the current version ofSolar Panel Controller 20663OSo (Paragraph [0185]). Speaker ControllerVersion Data 20663b1p is the version data representing the currentversion of Speaker Controller 20663OSp (Paragraph [0185]). VibratorController Version Data 20663b1q is the version data representing thecurrent version of Vibrator Controller 20663OSq (Paragraph [0185]).Video Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1r is the version datarepresenting the current version of Video Processor Controller 20663OSr(Paragraph [0185]). Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1sis the version data representing the current version of WirelessReceiver Controller 20663OSs (Paragraph [0185]). Wireless ReceiverController Version Data 20663b1t is the version data representing thecurrent version of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt (Paragraph[0185]). Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u is theversion data representing the current version of Wireless ReceiverController 20663OSu (Paragraph [0185]). Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data 20663b1v is the version data representing the currentversion of Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv (Paragraph [0185]).Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1w is the versiondata representing the current version of Wireless Transmitter Controller20663OSw (Paragraph [0185]). Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData 20663b1x is the version data representing the current version ofWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx (Paragraph [0185]). Here, theversion data is composed of numeric data, such as ‘1’, ‘2’, and ‘3’,wherein ‘1’ represents version ‘1.0’, ‘2’ represents version ‘2.0’, and‘3’ represents version ‘3.0’.

Paragraph [0190]—This Paragraph [0190] illustrates the software programsstored in OS Updating Software Storage Area 20663c (Paragraph [0186]).In the present embodiment, OS Updating Software Storage Area 20663cstores Battery Controller Updating Software 20663c1a, CCD UnitController Updating Software 20663c1b, Flash Light Unit ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1c, Indicator Controller Updating Software20663c1d, Input Device Controller Updating Software 20663c1e, LCDController Updating Software 20663c1f, LED Controller Updating Software20663c1g, Memory Card Interface Controller Updating Software 20663c1h,Microphone Controller Updating Software 20663c1i, Photometer ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1j, RAM Controller Updating Software 20663c1k,ROM Controller Updating Software 20663c1l, Signal Processor ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1m, Signal Processor Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1n, Solar Panel Controller Updating Software 20663c1o,Speaker Controller Updating Software 20663c1p, Vibrator ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1q, Video Processor Controller Updating Software20663c1r, Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software 20663c1s,Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software 20663c1t, WirelessReceiver Controller Updating Software 20663c1u, Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software 20663c1v, Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1w, and Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1x. Battery Controller Updating Software 20663c1a is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0197] and Paragraph [0198]. CCDUnit Controller Updating Software 20663c1b is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0199] and Paragraph [0200]. Flash Light UnitController Updating Software 20663c1c is the software program describedin Paragraph [0201] and Paragraph [0202]. Indicator Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1d is the software program described in Paragraph [0203]and Paragraph [0204]. Input Device Controller Updating Software 20663c1eis the software program described in Paragraph [0205] and Paragraph[0206]. LCD Controller Updating Software 20663c1f is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0207] and Paragraph [0208]. LEDController Updating Software 20663c1g is the software program describedin Paragraph [0209] and Paragraph [0210]. Memory Card InterfaceController Updating Software 20663c1h is the software program describedin Paragraph [0211] and Paragraph [0212]. Microphone Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1i is the software program described in Paragraph [0213]and Paragraph [0214]. Photometer Controller Updating Software 20663c1jis the software program described in Paragraph [0215] and Paragraph[0216]. RAM Controller Updating Software 20663c1k is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0217] and Paragraph [0218]. ROMController Updating Software 20663c1l is the software program describedin Paragraph [0219] and Paragraph [0220]. Signal Processor ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1m is the software program described inParagraph [0221] and Paragraph [0222]. Signal Processor ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1n is the software program described inParagraph [0223] and Paragraph [0224]. Solar Panel Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1o is the software program described in Paragraph [0225]and Paragraph [0226]. Speaker Controller Updating Software 20663c1p isthe software program described in Paragraph [0227] and Paragraph [0228].Vibrator Controller Updating Software 20663c1q is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0229] and Paragraph [0230]. Video ProcessorController Updating Software 20663c1r is the software program describedin Paragraph [0231] and Paragraph [0232]. Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1s is the software program described inParagraph [0233] and Paragraph [0234]. Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1t is the software program described inParagraph [0235] and Paragraph [0236]. Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1u is the software program described inParagraph [0237] and Paragraph [0238]. Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1v is the software program described inParagraph [0239] and Paragraph [0240]. Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1w is the software program described inParagraph [0241] and Paragraph [0242]. Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1x is the software program described inParagraph [0243] and Paragraph [0244].

Paragraph [0191]—This Paragraph [0191] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Host H (Paragraph [0025]). In the present embodiment, Host Hincludes Operating System H63OS of which the data stored therein aredescribed in Paragraph [0192], and OS Updating Information Storage AreaH63a of which the data and the software programs stored therein aredescribed in Paragraph [0193].

Paragraph [0192]—This Paragraph [0192] illustrates the data stored inOperating System H63OS (Paragraph [0191]). In the present embodiment,Operating System H63OS includes Battery Controller H63OSa, CCD UnitController H63OSb, Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc, IndicatorController H63OSd, Input Device Controller H63OSe, LCD ControllerH63OSf, LED Controller H63OSg, Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh,Microphone Controller H63OSi, Photometer Controller H63OSj, RAMController H63OSk, ROM Controller H63OSl, Signal Processor ControllerH63OSm, Signal Processor Controller H63OSn, Solar Panel ControllerH63OSo, Speaker Controller H63OSp, Vibrator Controller H63OSq, VideoProcessor Controller H63OSr, Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs,Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt, Wireless Receiver ControllerH63OSu, Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv, Wireless TransmitterController H63OSw, and Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx. BatteryController H63OSa is the controller of the latest version which controlsBattery 230 (not shown). CCD Unit Controller H63OSb is the controller ofthe latest version which controls CCD Unit 214 (not shown). Flash LightUnit Controller H63OSc is the controller of the latest version whichcontrols Flash Light Unit 220 (not shown). Indicator Controller H63OSdis the controller of the latest version which controls Indicator 212(not shown). Input Device Controller H63OSe is the controller of thelatest version which controls Input Device 210 (not shown). LCDController H63OSf is the controller of the latest version which controlsLCD 201 (not shown). LED Controller H63OSg is the controller of thelatest version which controls LED 219 (not shown). Memory Card InterfaceController H63OSh is the controller of the latest version which controlsMemory Card Interface 221 (not shown). Microphone Controller H63OSi isthe controller of the latest version which controls Microphone 215 (notshown). Photometer Controller H63OSj is the controller of the latestversion which controls Photometer 232 (not shown). RAM Controller H63OSkis the controller of the latest version which controls Host H (notshown). ROM Controller H63OSl is the controller of the latest versionwhich controls ROM 207 (not shown). Signal Processor Controller H63OSmis the controller of the latest version which controls Signal Processor205 (not shown). Signal Processor Controller H63OSn is the controller ofthe latest version which controls Signal Processor 208 (not shown).Solar Panel Controller H63OSo is the controller of the latest versionwhich controls Solar Panel 229 (not shown). Speaker Controller H63OSp isthe controller of the latest version which controls Speaker 216L (notshown). Vibrator Controller H63OSq is the controller of the latestversion which controls Vibrator 217 (not shown). Video ProcessorController H63OSr is the controller of the latest version which controlsVideo Processor 202 (not shown). Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs isthe controller of the latest version which controls Wireless Receiver224 (not shown). Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt is the controllerof the latest version which controls Wireless Receiver 225 (not shown).Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu is the controller of the latestversion which controls Wireless Receiver 226 (not shown). WirelessTransmitter Controller H63OSv is the controller of the latest versionwhich controls Wireless Transmitter 222 (not shown). WirelessTransmitter Controller H63OSw is the controller of the latest versionwhich controls Wireless Transmitter 223 (not shown). WirelessTransmitter Controller H63OSx is the controller of the latest versionwhich controls Wireless Transmitter 227 (not shown). The data stored inOperating System Storage Area H63OS are updated periodically. For theavoidance of doubt, the data stored in Operating System H63OS areillustrative, and other types of data, which are utilized to updateOperating System H63OS of Communication Device 200 by implementing thepresent function, are also stored therein, such as DLLs, drivers,security implementing program. The data stored in Operating System H63OSare updated periodically thereby the data are always of the latestversion.

Paragraph [0193]—This Paragraph [0193] illustrates the storage areasincluded in OS Updating Information Storage Area H63a (Paragraph[0191]). In the present embodiment, OS Updating Information Storage AreaH63a includes OS Updating Data Storage Area H63b and OS UpdatingSoftware Storage Area H63c. OS Updating Data Storage Area H63b storesthe data necessary to implement the present function on the side of HostH (Paragraph [0025]), such as the ones described in Paragraph [0194]. OSUpdating Software Storage Area H63c stores the software programsnecessary to implement the present function on the side of Host H, suchas the ones described in Paragraph [0196].

Paragraph [0194]—This Paragraph [0194] illustrates the storage areaincluded in OS Updating Data Storage Area H63b (Paragraph [0193]). Inthe present embodiment, OS Updating Data Storage Area H63b includes OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1. OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1stores the data described in Paragraph [0195].

Paragraph [0195]—This Paragraph [0195] illustrates the data stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0194]). In the presentembodiment, OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 includes BatteryController Version Data H63b1a, CCD Unit Controller Version Data H63b1b,Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63b1c, Indicator ControllerVersion Data H63b1d, Input Device Controller Version Data H63b1e, LCDController Version Data H63b1f, LED Controller Version Data H63b1g,Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data H63b1h, MicrophoneController Version Data H63b1i, Photometer Controller Version DataH63b1j, RAM Controller Version Data H63b1k, ROM Controller Version DataH63b1l, Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1m, SignalProcessor Controller Version Data H63b1n, Solar Panel Controller VersionData H63b1o, Speaker Controller Version Data H63b1p, Vibrator ControllerVersion Data H63b1q, Video Processor Controller Version Data H63b1r,Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1s, Wireless ReceiverController Version Data H63b1t, Wireless Receiver Controller VersionData H63b1u, Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1v,Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1w, and WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data H63b1x. Battery Controller VersionData H63b1a is the version data representing the latest version ofBattery Controller H63OSa (Paragraph [0192]). CCD Unit ControllerVersion Data H63b1b is the version data representing the latest versionof CCD Unit Controller H63OSb (Paragraph [0192]). Flash Light UnitController Version Data H63b1c is the version data representing thelatest version of Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc (Paragraph [0192]).Indicator Controller Version Data H63b1d is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Indicator Controller H63OSd(Paragraph [0192]). Input Device Controller Version Data H63b1e is theversion data representing the latest version of Input Device ControllerH63OSe (Paragraph [0192]). LCD Controller Version Data H63b1f is theversion data representing the latest version of LCD Controller H63OSf(Paragraph [0192]). LED Controller Version Data H63b1g is the versiondata representing the latest version of LED Controller H63OSg (Paragraph[0192]). Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data H63b1h is theversion data representing the latest version of Memory Card InterfaceController H63OSh (Paragraph [0192]). Microphone Controller Version DataH63b1i is the version data representing the latest version of MicrophoneController H63OSi (Paragraph [0192]). Photometer Controller Version DataH63b1j is the version data representing the latest version of PhotometerController H63OSj (Paragraph [0192]). RAM Controller Version Data H63b1kis the version data representing the latest version of RAM ControllerH63OSk (Paragraph [0192]). ROM Controller Version Data H63b1l is theversion data representing the latest version of ROM Controller H63OSl(Paragraph [0192]). Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1m isthe version data representing the latest version of Signal ProcessorController H63OSm (Paragraph [0192]). Signal Processor ControllerVersion Data H63b1n is the version data representing the latest versionof Signal Processor Controller H63OSn (Paragraph [0192]). Solar PanelController Version Data H63b1o is the version data representing thelatest version of Solar Panel Controller H63OSo (Paragraph [0192]).Speaker Controller Version Data H63b1p is the version data representingthe latest version of Speaker Controller H63OSp (Paragraph [0192]).Vibrator Controller Version Data H63b1q is the version data representingthe latest version of Vibrator Controller H63OSq (Paragraph [0192]).Video Processor Controller Version Data H63b1r is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Video Processor Controller H63OSr(Paragraph [0192]). Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1s isthe version data representing the latest version of Wireless ReceiverController H63OSs (Paragraph [0192]). Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63b1t is the version data representing the latest versionof Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt (Paragraph [0192]). WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data H63b1u is the version data representingthe latest version of Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu (Paragraph[0192]). Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data H63b1v is theversion data representing the latest version of Wireless TransmitterController H63OSv (Paragraph [0192]). Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data H63b1w is the version data representing the latest versionof Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw (Paragraph [0192]). WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data H63b1x is the version datarepresenting the latest version of Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSx (Paragraph [0192]). Here, the version data is composed of numericdata, such as ‘1’, ‘2’, and ‘3’, wherein ‘1’ represents version ‘1.0’,‘2’ represents version ‘2.0’, and ‘3’ represents version ‘3.0’. The datastored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 are updated periodically.

Paragraph [0196]—This Paragraph [0196] illustrates the software programsstored in OS Updating Software Storage Area H63c (Paragraph [0193]). Inthe present embodiment, OS Updating Software Storage Area H63c storesBattery Controller Updating Software H63c1a, CCD Unit ControllerUpdating Software H63c1b, Flash Light Unit Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1c, Indicator Controller Updating Software H63c1d, Input DeviceController Updating Software H63c1e, LCD Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1f, LED Controller Updating Software H63c1g, Memory Card InterfaceController Updating Software H63c1h, Microphone Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1i, Photometer Controller Updating Software H63c1j, RAMController Updating Software H63c1k, ROM Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1l, Signal Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1m, SignalProcessor Controller Updating Software H63c1n, Solar Panel ControllerUpdating Software H63c1o, Speaker Controller Updating Software H63c1p,Vibrator Controller Updating Software H63c1q, Video Processor ControllerUpdating Software H63c1r, Wireless Receiver Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1s, Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63c1t, WirelessReceiver Controller Updating Software H63c1u, Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software H63c1v, Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software H63c1w, and Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1x. Battery Controller Updating Software H63c1a is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0197] and Paragraph [0198]. CCDUnit Controller Updating Software H63c1b is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0199] and Paragraph [0200]. Flash Light UnitController Updating Software H63c1c is the software program described inParagraph [0201] and Paragraph [0202]. Indicator Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1d is the software program described in Paragraph andParagraph [0204]. Input Device Controller Updating Software H63c1e isthe software program described in Paragraph [0205] and Paragraph [0206].LCD Controller Updating Software H63c1f is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0207] and Paragraph [0208]. LED ControllerUpdating Software H63c1g is the software program described in Paragraph[0209] and Paragraph [0210]. Memory Card Interface Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1h is the software program described in Paragraph [0211]and Paragraph [0212]. Microphone Controller Updating Software H63c1i isthe software program described in Paragraph [0213] and Paragraph [0214].Photometer Controller Updating Software H63c1j is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0215] and Paragraph [0216]. RAM ControllerUpdating Software H63c1k is the software program described in Paragraph[0217] and Paragraph [0218]. ROM Controller Updating Software H63c1l isthe software program described in Paragraph [0219] and Paragraph [0220].Signal Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1m is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0221] and Paragraph [0222]. SignalProcessor Controller Updating Software H63c1n is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0223] and Paragraph [0224]. Solar PanelController Updating Software H63c1o is the software program described inParagraph [0225] and Paragraph [0226]. Speaker Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1p is the software program described in Paragraph [0227]and Paragraph [0228]. Vibrator Controller Updating Software H63c1q isthe software program described in Paragraph [0229] and Paragraph [0230].Video Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1r is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0231] and Paragraph [0232]. WirelessReceiver Controller Updating Software H63c1s is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0233] and Paragraph [0234]. Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63c1t is the software program described inParagraph [0235] and Paragraph [0236]. Wireless Receiver ControllerUpdating Software H63c1u is the software program described in Paragraph[0237] and Paragraph [0238]. Wireless Transmitter Controller UpdatingSoftware H63c1v is the software program described in Paragraph [0239]and Paragraph [0240]. Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1w is the software program described in Paragraph [0241] andParagraph [0242]. Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating SoftwareH63c1x is the software program described in Paragraph [0243] andParagraph [0244]. The foregoing software programs are automaticallyimplemented periodically or implemented manually by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system.

Paragraph [0197]—This Paragraph [0197] illustrates Battery ControllerUpdating Software H63c1a (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and Battery Controller Updating Software 20663c1a (Paragraph [0190]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update Battery Controller 20663OSastored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of CommunicationDevice 200 retrieves Battery Controller Version Data 20663b1a from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the datato Host H (S1). Upon receiving Battery Controller Version Data 20663b1a(Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesBattery Controller Version Data 20663b1a (Paragraph [0189]) with BatteryController Version Data H63b1a stored in OS Version Data Storage AreaH63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects inS3 that Battery Controller Version Data 20663b1a of Communication Device200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Battery Controller H63OSa,which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S4). Upon receiving Battery Controller H63OSa from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Battery Controller H63OSa as Battery Controller 20663OSa inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version ofBattery Controller 20663OSa (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0198]—This Paragraph [0198] illustrates another embodiment ofBattery Controller Updating Software H63c1a (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Battery Controller Updating Software 20663c1a(Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which update BatteryController 20663OSa stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Battery Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the Battery ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send Battery Controller Version DataH63b1a (Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.In response to the request, Host H retrieves Battery Controller VersionData H63b1a from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]),and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receivingBattery Controller Version Data H63b1a from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Battery Controller Version Data H63b1a with Battery ControllerVersion Data 20663b1a stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1(Paragraph [0189]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming thatCPU211 detects in S4 that Battery Controller Version Data 20663b1a ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewBattery Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New Battery Controller Sending Request is a request to sendBattery Controller H63OSa (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Battery Controller H63OSa(Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Battery ControllerH63OSa from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Battery Controller H63OSa asBattery Controller 20663OSa in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) (S8). The old version of Battery Controller 20663OSa (Paragraph[0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0199]—This Paragraph [0199] illustrates CCD Unit ControllerUpdating Software H63c1b (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and CCD Unit Controller Updating Software 20663c1b (Paragraph [0190]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update CCD Unit Controller 20663OSbstored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of CommunicationDevice 200 retrieves CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the datato Host H (S1). Upon receiving CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b(Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesCCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b (Paragraph [0189]) with CCDUnit Controller Version Data H63b1b stored in OS Version Data StorageArea H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host Hdetects in S3 that CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves CCD UnitController H63OSb, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving CCD Unit Controller H63OSbfrom Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores CCD Unit Controller H63OSb as CCD UnitController 20663OSb in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S6).The old version of CCD Unit Controller 20663OSb (Paragraph [0185]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0200]—This Paragraph [0200] illustrates another embodiment ofCCD Unit Controller Updating Software H63c1b (Paragraph [0196]) of HostH (Paragraph [0025]) and CCD Unit Controller Updating Software 20663c1b(Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which update CCD UnitController 20663OSb stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a CCD Unit Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the CCD Unit ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send CCD Unit Controller Version DataH63b1b (Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.In response to the request, Host H retrieves CCD Unit Controller VersionData H63b1b from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]),and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving CCDUnit Controller Version Data H63b1b from Host H (S3), CPU 211 comparesCCD Unit Controller Version Data H63b1b with CCD Unit Controller VersionData 20663b1b stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph[0189]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detectsin S4 that CCD Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1b of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New CCD Unit ControllerSending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New CCDUnit Controller Sending Request is a request to send CCD Unit ControllerH63OSb (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.Host H retrieves CCD Unit Controller H63OSb (Paragraph [0192]), which isof the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S6). Upon receiving CCD Unit Controller H63OSb from Host H (S7), CPU211 stores CCD Unit Controller H63OSb as CCD Unit Controller 20663OSb inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The old version of CCDUnit Controller 20663OSb (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0201]—This Paragraph [0201] illustrates Flash Light UnitController Updating Software H63c1c (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Flash Light Unit Controller Updating Software20663c1c (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateFlash Light Unit Controller 206639OSc stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves FlashLight Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1c from OS Version Data StorageArea 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1c (Paragraph[0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Flash LightUnit Controller Version Data 20663b1c (Paragraph [0189]) with FlashLight Unit Controller Version Data H63b1c stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that HostH detects in S3 that Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1cof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves FlashLight Unit Controller H63OSc, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Flash LightUnit Controller H63OSc from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Flash Light UnitController H63OSc as Flash Light Unit Controller 206639OSc in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version of Flash LightUnit Controller 206639OSc (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0202]—This Paragraph [0202] illustrates another embodiment ofFlash Light Unit Controller Updating Software H63c1c (Paragraph [0196])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Flash Light Unit Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1c (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Flash Light Unit Controller 206639OSc stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a FlashLight Unit Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1).Here, the Flash Light Unit Controller Update Request is a request tosend Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63b1c (Paragraph [0195])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. In response to therequest, Host H retrieves Flash Light Unit Controller Version DataH63b1c from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving FlashLight Unit Controller Version Data H63b1c from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Flash Light Unit Controller Version Data H63b1c with FlashLight Unit Controller Version Data 20663b1c stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Flash Light UnitController Version Data 20663b1c of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Flash Light Unit Controller SendingRequest, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New Flash LightUnit Controller Sending Request is a request to send Flash Light UnitController H63OSc (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. Host H retrieves Flash Light Unit Controller H63OSc(Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Flash Light UnitController H63OSc from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Flash Light UnitController H63OSc as Flash Light Unit Controller 206639OSc in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The old version of Flash LightUnit Controller 206639OSc (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0203]—This Paragraph [0203] illustrates Indicator ControllerUpdating Software H63c1d (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and Indicator Controller Updating Software 20663c1d (Paragraph [0190])of Communication Device 200, which update Indicator Controller 20663OSdstored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of CommunicationDevice 200 retrieves Indicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the datato Host H (S1). Upon receiving Indicator Controller Version Data20663b1d (Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host Hcompares Indicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d (Paragraph [0189])with Indicator Controller Version Data H63b1d stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that HostH detects in S3 that Indicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrievesIndicator Controller H63OSd, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving IndicatorController H63OSd from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Indicator ControllerH63OSd as Indicator Controller 20663OSd in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version of Indicator Controller20663OSd (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0204]—This Paragraph [0204] illustrates another embodiment ofIndicator Controller Updating Software H63c1d (Paragraph [0196]) of HostH (Paragraph [0025]) and Indicator Controller Updating Software 20663c1d(Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which update IndicatorController 20663OSd stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Indicator Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the IndicatorController Update Request is a request to send Indicator ControllerVersion Data H63b1d (Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. In response to the request, Host H retrieves IndicatorController Version Data H63b1d from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0195]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2).Upon receiving Indicator Controller Version Data H63b1d from Host H(S3), CPU 211 compares Indicator Controller Version Data H63b1d withIndicator Controller Version Data 20663b1d stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Indicator ControllerVersion Data 20663b1d of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.CPU 211 sends a New Indicator Controller Sending Request, which isreceived by Host H (S5). Here, the New Indicator Controller SendingRequest is a request to send Indicator Controller H63OSd (Paragraph[0192]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrievesIndicator Controller H63OSd (Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Indicator Controller H63OSd from Host H (S7), CPU 211 storesIndicator Controller H63OSd as Indicator Controller 20663OSd inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The old version ofIndicator Controller 20663OSd (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0205]—This Paragraph [0205] illustrates Input DeviceController Updating Software H63c1e (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Input Device Controller Updating Software20663c1e (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateInput Device Controller 20663OSe stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves InputDevice Controller Version Data 20663b1e from OS Version Data StorageArea 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Input Device Controller Version Data 20663b1e (Paragraph[0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Input DeviceController Version Data 20663b1e (Paragraph [0189]) with Input DeviceController Version Data H63b1e stored in OS Version Data Storage AreaH63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects inS3 that Input Device Controller Version Data 20663b1e of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Input DeviceController H63OSe, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Input Device ControllerH63OSe from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Input Device Controller H63OSeas Input Device Controller 20663OSe in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version of Input Device Controller20663OSe (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0206]—This Paragraph [0206] illustrates another embodiment ofInput Device Controller Updating Software H63c1e (Paragraph [0196]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Input Device Controller Updating Software20663c1e (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateInput Device Controller 20663OSe stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a InputDevice Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1).Here, the Input Device Controller Update Request is a request to sendInput Device Controller Version Data H63b1e (Paragraph [0195]) stored inHost H to Communication Device 200. In response to the request, Host Hretrieves Input Device Controller Version Data H63b1e from OS VersionData Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), and sends the data toCommunication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving Input Device ControllerVersion Data H63b1e from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Input DeviceController Version Data H63b1e with Input Device Controller Version Data20663b1e stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph[0189]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detectsin S4 that Input Device Controller Version Data 20663b1e ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New InputDevice Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New Input Device Controller Sending Request is a request tosend Input Device Controller H63OSe (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host Hto Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Input Device ControllerH63OSe (Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Input DeviceController H63OSe from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Input DeviceController H63OSe as Input Device Controller 20663OSe in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The old version of Input DeviceController 20663OSe (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0207]—This Paragraph [0207] illustrates LCD ControllerUpdating Software H63c1f (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and LCD Controller Updating Software 20663c1f (Paragraph [0190]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update LCD Controller 20663OSf stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f from OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to Host H(S1). Upon receiving LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f (Paragraph[0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares LCDController Version Data 20663b1f (Paragraph [0189]) with LCD ControllerVersion Data H63b1f stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. Host H retrieves LCD Controller H63OSf, which is ofthe latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0192]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving LCD Controller H63OSf from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores LCDController H63OSf as LCD Controller 20663OSf in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version of LCD Controller 20663OSf(Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0208]—This Paragraph [0208] illustrates another embodiment ofLCD Controller Updating Software H63c1f (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and LCD Controller Updating Software 20663c1f(Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which update LCDController 20663OSf stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a LCD Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the LCD ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send LCD Controller Version Data H63b1f(Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves LCD Controller Version DataH63b1f from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving LCDController Version Data H63b1f from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares LCDController Version Data H63b1f with LCD Controller Version Data 20663b1fstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatLCD Controller Version Data 20663b1f of Communication Device 200 is ofan old version. CPU 211 sends a New LCD Controller Sending Request,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New LCD Controller SendingRequest is a request to send LCD Controller H63OSf (Paragraph [0192])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves LCDController H63OSf (Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving LCDController H63OSf from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores LCD Controller H63OSfas LCD Controller 20663OSf in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) (S8). The old version of LCD Controller 20663OSf (Paragraph[0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0209]—This Paragraph [0209] illustrates LED ControllerUpdating Software H63c1g (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and LED Controller Updating Software 20663c1g (Paragraph [0190]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update LED Controller 20663OSg stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves LED Controller Version Data 20663b1g from OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to Host H(S1). Upon receiving LED Controller Version Data 20663b1g (Paragraph[0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares LEDController Version Data 20663b1g (Paragraph [0189]) with LED ControllerVersion Data H63b1g stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that LED Controller Version Data 20663b1g of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. Host H retrieves LED Controller H63OSg, which is ofthe latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0192]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving LED Controller H63OSg from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores LEDController H63OSg as LED Controller 20663OSg in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version of LED Controller 20663OSg(Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0210]—This Paragraph [0210] illustrates another embodiment ofLED Controller Updating Software H63c1g (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and LED Controller Updating Software 20663c1g(Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which update LEDController 20663OSg stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a LED Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the LED ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send LED Controller Version Data H63b1g(Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves LED Controller Version DataH63b1g from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving LEDController Version Data H63b1g from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares LEDController Version Data H63b1g with LED Controller Version Data 20663b1gstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatLED Controller Version Data 20663b1g of Communication Device 200 is ofan old version. CPU 211 sends a New LED Controller Sending Request,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New LED Controller SendingRequest is a request to send LED Controller H63OSg (Paragraph [0192])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves LEDController H63OSg (Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving LEDController H63OSg from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores LED Controller H63OSgas LED Controller 20663OSg in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) (S8). The old version of LED Controller 20663OSg (Paragraph[0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0211]—This Paragraph [0211] illustrates Memory Card InterfaceController Updating Software H63c1h (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Memory Card Interface Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1h (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh stored in OperatingSystem 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663b1h from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the datato Host H (S1). Upon receiving Memory Card Interface Controller VersionData 20663b1h (Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2),Host H compares Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data 20663b1h(Paragraph [0189]) with Memory Card Interface Controller Version DataH63b1h stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195])of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Memory CardInterface Controller Version Data 20663b1h of Communication Device 200is of an old version. Host H retrieves Memory Card Interface ControllerH63OSh, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Memory Card Interface Controller H63OShfrom Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Memory Card Interface Controller H63OShas Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version of Memory Card InterfaceController 20663OSh (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0212]—This Paragraph [0212] illustrates another embodiment ofMemory Card Interface Controller Updating Software H63c1h (Paragraph[0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Memory Card InterfaceController Updating Software 20663c1h (Paragraph [0190]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update Memory Card Interface Controller20663OSh stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) ofCommunication Device 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 sends a Memory Card Interface Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the Memory CardInterface Controller Update Request is a request to send Memory CardInterface Controller Version Data H63b1h (Paragraph [0195]) stored inHost H to Communication Device 200. In response to the request, Host Hretrieves Memory Card Interface Controller Version Data H63b1h from OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), and sends the datato Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving Memory Card InterfaceController Version Data H63b1h from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares MemoryCard Interface Controller Version Data H63b1h with Memory Card InterfaceController Version Data 20663b1h stored in OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assumingthat CPU211 detects in S4 that Memory Card Interface Controller VersionData 20663b1h of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211sends a New Memory Card Interface Controller Sending Request, which isreceived by Host H (S5). Here, the New Memory Card Interface ControllerSending Request is a request to send Memory Card Interface ControllerH63OSh (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.Host H retrieves Memory Card Interface Controller H63OSh (Paragraph[0192]), which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S6). Upon receiving Memory Card Interface Controller H63OShfrom Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Memory Card Interface Controller H63OShas Memory Card Interface Controller 20663OSh in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The old version of Memory Card InterfaceController 20663OSh (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0213]—This Paragraph [0213] illustrates Microphone ControllerUpdating Software H63c1i (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and Microphone Controller Updating Software 20663c1i (Paragraph [0190])of Communication Device 200, which update Microphone Controller 20663OSistored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of CommunicationDevice 200 retrieves Microphone Controller Version Data 20663b1i from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the datato Host H (S1). Upon receiving Microphone Controller Version Data20663b1i (Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host Hcompares Microphone Controller Version Data 20663b1i (Paragraph [0189])with Microphone Controller Version Data H63b1i stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that HostH detects in S3 that Microphone Controller Version Data 20663b1i ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrievesMicrophone Controller H63OSi, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving MicrophoneController H63OSi from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Microphone ControllerH63OSi as Microphone Controller 20663OSi in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version of Microphone Controller20663OSi (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0214]—This Paragraph [0214] illustrates another embodiment ofMicrophone Controller Updating Software H63c1i (Paragraph [0196]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Microphone Controller Updating Software20663c1i (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateMicrophone Controller 20663OSi stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aMicrophone Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1).Here, the Microphone Controller Update Request is a request to sendMicrophone Controller Version Data H63b1i (Paragraph [0195]) stored inHost H to Communication Device 200. In response to the request, Host Hretrieves Microphone Controller Version Data H63b1i from OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), and sends the data toCommunication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving Microphone ControllerVersion Data H63b1i from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares MicrophoneController Version Data H63b1i with Microphone Controller Version Data20663b1i stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph[0189]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detectsin S4 that Microphone Controller Version Data 20663b1i of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New MicrophoneController Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, theNew Microphone Controller Sending Request is a request to sendMicrophone Controller H63OSi (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Microphone Controller H63OSi(Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Microphone ControllerH63OSi from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Microphone Controller H63OSi asMicrophone Controller 20663OSi in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) (S8). The old version of Microphone Controller 20663OSi(Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0215]—This Paragraph [0215] illustrates Photometer ControllerUpdating Software H63c1j (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and Photometer Controller Updating Software 20663c1j (Paragraph [0190])of Communication Device 200, which update Photometer Controller 20663OSjstored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of CommunicationDevice 200 retrieves Photometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the datato Host H (S1). Upon receiving Photometer Controller Version Data20663b1j (Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host Hcompares Photometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j (Paragraph [0189])with Photometer Controller Version Data H63b1j stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that HostH detects in S3 that Photometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrievesPhotometer Controller H63OSj, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving PhotometerController H63OSj from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Photometer ControllerH63OSj as Photometer Controller 20663OSj in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version of Photometer Controller20663OSj (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0216]—This Paragraph [0216] illustrates another embodiment ofPhotometer Controller Updating Software H63c1j (Paragraph [0196]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Photometer Controller Updating Software20663c1j (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updatePhotometer Controller 20663OSj stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aPhotometer Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1).Here, the Photometer Controller Update Request is a request to sendPhotometer Controller Version Data H63b1j (Paragraph [0195]) stored inHost H to Communication Device 200. In response to the request, Host Hretrieves Photometer Controller Version Data H63b1j from OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), and sends the data toCommunication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving Photometer ControllerVersion Data H63b1j from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares PhotometerController Version Data H63b1j with Photometer Controller Version Data20663b1j stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph[0189]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detectsin S4 that Photometer Controller Version Data 20663b1j of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New PhotometerController Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, theNew Photometer Controller Sending Request is a request to sendPhotometer Controller H63OSj (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Photometer Controller H63OSj(Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Photometer ControllerH63OSj from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Photometer Controller H63OSj asPhotometer Controller 20663OSj in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) (S8). The old version of Photometer Controller 20663OSj(Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0217]—This Paragraph [0217] illustrates RAM ControllerUpdating Software H63c1k (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and RAM Controller Updating Software 20663c1k (Paragraph [0190]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update RAM Controller 20663OSk stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves RAM Controller Version Data 20663b1k from OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to Host H(S1). Upon receiving RAM Controller Version Data 20663b1k (Paragraph[0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares RAMController Version Data 20663b1k (Paragraph [0189]) with RAM ControllerVersion Data H63b1k stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that RAM Controller Version Data 20663b1k of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. Host H retrieves RAM Controller H63OSk, which is ofthe latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0192]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving RAM Controller H63OSk from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores RAMController H63OSk as RAM Controller 20663OSk in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version of RAM Controller 20663OSk(Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0218]—This Paragraph [0218] illustrates another embodiment ofRAM Controller Updating Software H63c1k (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and RAM Controller Updating Software 20663c1k(Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which update RAMController 20663OSk stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a RAM Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the RAM ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send RAM Controller Version Data H63b1k(Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves RAM Controller Version DataH63b1k from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving RAMController Version Data H63b1k from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares RAMController Version Data H63b1k with RAM Controller Version Data 20663b1kstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatRAM Controller Version Data 20663b1k of Communication Device 200 is ofan old version. CPU 211 sends a New RAM Controller Sending Request,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New RAM Controller SendingRequest is a request to send RAM Controller H63OSk (Paragraph [0192])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves RAMController H63OSk (Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving RAMController H63OSk from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores RAM Controller H63OSkas RAM Controller 20663OSk in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) (S8). The old version of RAM Controller 20663OSk (Paragraph[0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0219]—This Paragraph [0219] illustrates ROM ControllerUpdating Software H63c1l (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and ROM Controller Updating Software 20663c1l (Paragraph [0190]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update ROM Controller 20663OSl stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves ROM Controller Version Data 20663b1l from OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to Host H(S1). Upon receiving ROM Controller Version Data 20663b1l (Paragraph[0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares ROMController Version Data 20663b1l (Paragraph [0189]) with ROM ControllerVersion Data H63b1l stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that ROM Controller Version Data 20663b1l of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. Host H retrieves ROM Controller H63OSl, which is ofthe latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0192]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving ROM Controller H63OSl from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores ROMController H63OSl as ROM Controller 20663OSl in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version of ROM Controller 20663OSl(Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0220]—This Paragraph [0220] illustrates another embodiment ofROM Controller Updating Software H63c1l (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and ROM Controller Updating Software 20663c1l(Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which update ROMController 20663OSl stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a ROM Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the ROM ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send ROM Controller Version Data H63b1l(Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves ROM Controller Version DataH63b1l from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving ROMController Version Data H63b1l from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares ROMController Version Data H63b1l with ROM Controller Version Data 20663b1lstored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) ofCommunication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 thatROM Controller Version Data 20663b1l of Communication Device 200 is ofan old version. CPU 211 sends a New ROM Controller Sending Request,which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New ROM Controller SendingRequest is a request to send ROM Controller H63OSl (Paragraph [0192])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves ROMController H63OSl (Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving ROMController H63OSl from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores ROM Controller H63OSlas ROM Controller 20663OSl in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) (S8). The old version of ROM Controller 20663OSl (Paragraph[0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0221]—This Paragraph [0221] illustrates Signal ProcessorController Updating Software H63c1m (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Signal Processor Controller Updating Software20663c1m (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateSignal Processor Controller 20663OSm stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesSignal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1m from OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to Host H(S1). Upon receiving Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1m(Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesSignal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1m (Paragraph [0189])with Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1m stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Signal Processor ControllerVersion Data 20663b1m of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.Host H retrieves Signal Processor Controller H63OSm, which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0192]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Signal Processor Controller H63OSm from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Signal Processor Controller H63OSm as Signal Processor Controller20663OSm in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The oldversion of Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm (Paragraph [0185]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0222]—This Paragraph [0222] illustrates another embodiment ofSignal Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1m (Paragraph [0196])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Signal Processor Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1m (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a SignalProcessor Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1).Here, the Signal Processor Controller Update Request is a request tosend Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1m (Paragraph [0195])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. In response to therequest, Host H retrieves Signal Processor Controller Version DataH63b1m from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving SignalProcessor Controller Version Data H63b1m from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1m with SignalProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1m stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1m of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Signal Processor Controller SendingRequest, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New SignalProcessor Controller Sending Request is a request to send SignalProcessor Controller H63OSm (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Signal Processor ControllerH63OSm (Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving SignalProcessor Controller H63OSm from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores SignalProcessor Controller H63OSm as Signal Processor Controller 20663OSm inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The old version ofSignal Processor Controller 20663OSm (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0223]—This Paragraph [0223] illustrates Signal ProcessorController Updating Software H63c1n (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Signal Processor Controller Updating Software20663c1n (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateSignal Processor Controller 20663OSn stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesSignal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1n from OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to Host H(S1). Upon receiving Signal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1n(Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesSignal Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1n (Paragraph [0189])with Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1n stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Signal Processor ControllerVersion Data 20663b1n of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.Host H retrieves Signal Processor Controller H63OSn, which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0192]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Signal Processor Controller H63OSn from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Signal Processor Controller H63OSn as Signal Processor Controller20663OSn in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The oldversion of Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn (Paragraph [0185]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0224]—This Paragraph [0224] illustrates another embodiment ofSignal Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1n (Paragraph [0196])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Signal Processor Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1n (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a SignalProcessor Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1).Here, the Signal Processor Controller Update Request is a request tosend Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1n (Paragraph [0195])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. In response to therequest, Host H retrieves Signal Processor Controller Version DataH63b1n from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), andsends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving SignalProcessor Controller Version Data H63b1n from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Signal Processor Controller Version Data H63b1n with SignalProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1n stored in OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) of Communication Device 200(S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that Signal ProcessorController Version Data 20663b1n of Communication Device 200 is of anold version. CPU 211 sends a New Signal Processor Controller SendingRequest, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the New SignalProcessor Controller Sending Request is a request to send SignalProcessor Controller H63OSn (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Signal Processor ControllerH63OSn (Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving SignalProcessor Controller H63OSn from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores SignalProcessor Controller H63OSn as Signal Processor Controller 20663OSn inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The old version ofSignal Processor Controller 20663OSn (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0225]—This Paragraph [0225] illustrates Solar PanelController Updating Software H63c1o (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Solar Panel Controller Updating Software 20663c1o(Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which update Solar PanelController 20663OSo stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data 20663b1o from OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1(Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Upon receivingSolar Panel Controller Version Data 20663b1o (Paragraph [0189]) fromCommunication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data 20663b1o (Paragraph [0189]) with Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data H63b1o stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1(Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3that Solar Panel Controller Version Data 20663b1o of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Solar Panel ControllerH63OSo, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Solar Panel Controller H63OSo from HostH (S5), CPU 211 stores Solar Panel Controller H63OSo as Solar PanelController 20663OSo in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S6).The old version of Solar Panel Controller 20663OSo (Paragraph [0185]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0226]—This Paragraph [0226] illustrates another embodiment ofSolar Panel Controller Updating Software H63c1o (Paragraph [0196]) ofHost H (Paragraph [0025]) and Solar Panel Controller Updating Software20663c1o (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateSolar Panel Controller 20663OSo stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a SolarPanel Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1). Here,the Solar Panel Controller Update Request is a request to send SolarPanel Controller Version Data H63b1o (Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host Hto Communication Device 200. In response to the request, Host Hretrieves Solar Panel Controller Version Data H63b1o from OS VersionData Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), and sends the data toCommunication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving Solar Panel ControllerVersion Data H63b1o from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Solar PanelController Version Data H63b1o with Solar Panel Controller Version Data20663b1o stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph[0189]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detectsin S4 that Solar Panel Controller Version Data 20663b1o of CommunicationDevice 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Solar PanelController Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, theNew Solar Panel Controller Sending Request is a request to send SolarPanel Controller H63OSo (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Solar Panel Controller H63OSo(Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Solar Panel ControllerH63OSo from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Solar Panel Controller H63OSo asSolar Panel Controller 20663OSo in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) (S8). The old version of Solar Panel Controller 20663OSo(Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0227]—This Paragraph [0227] illustrates Speaker ControllerUpdating Software H63c1p (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and Speaker Controller Updating Software 20663c1p (Paragraph [0190]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update Speaker Controller 20663OSpstored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of CommunicationDevice 200 retrieves Speaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the datato Host H (S1). Upon receiving Speaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p(Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesSpeaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p (Paragraph [0189]) with SpeakerController Version Data H63b1p stored in OS Version Data Storage AreaH63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects inS3 that Speaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p of Communication Device200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves Speaker Controller H63OSp,which is of the latest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS(Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200(S4). Upon receiving Speaker Controller H63OSp from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Speaker Controller H63OSp as Speaker Controller 20663OSp inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version ofSpeaker Controller 20663OSp (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0228]—This Paragraph [0228] illustrates another embodiment ofSpeaker Controller Updating Software H63c1p (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Speaker Controller Updating Software 20663c1p(Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which update SpeakerController 20663OSp stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Speaker Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the Speaker ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send Speaker Controller Version DataH63b1p (Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.In response to the request, Host H retrieves Speaker Controller VersionData H63b1p from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]),and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receivingSpeaker Controller Version Data H63b1p from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Speaker Controller Version Data H63b1p with Speaker ControllerVersion Data 20663b1p stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1(Paragraph [0189]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming thatCPU211 detects in S4 that Speaker Controller Version Data 20663b1p ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewSpeaker Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New Speaker Controller Sending Request is a request to sendSpeaker Controller H63OSp (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Speaker Controller H63OSp(Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Speaker ControllerH63OSp from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Speaker Controller H63OSp asSpeaker Controller 20663OSp in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) (S8). The old version of Speaker Controller 20663OSp (Paragraph[0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0229]—This Paragraph [0229] illustrates Vibrator ControllerUpdating Software H63c1q (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025])and Vibrator Controller Updating Software 20663c1q (Paragraph [0190]) ofCommunication Device 200, which update Vibrator Controller 20663OSqstored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of CommunicationDevice 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of CommunicationDevice 200 retrieves Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q from OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the datato Host H (S1). Upon receiving Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q(Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesVibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q (Paragraph [0189]) withVibrator Controller Version Data H63b1q stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that HostH detects in S3 that Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1q ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves VibratorController H63OSq, which is of the latest version, from Operating SystemStorage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller toCommunication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving Vibrator Controller H63OSqfrom Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Vibrator Controller H63OSq as VibratorController 20663OSq in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S6).The old version of Vibrator Controller 20663OSq (Paragraph [0185]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0230]—This Paragraph [0230] illustrates another embodiment ofVibrator Controller Updating Software H63c1q (Paragraph [0196]) of HostH (Paragraph [0025]) and Vibrator Controller Updating Software 20663c1q(Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which update VibratorController 20663OSq stored in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the present embodiment, CPU 211(FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a Vibrator Controller UpdateRequest, which is received by Host H (S1). Here, the Vibrator ControllerUpdate Request is a request to send Vibrator Controller Version DataH63b1q (Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.In response to the request, Host H retrieves Vibrator Controller VersionData H63b1q from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]),and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receivingVibrator Controller Version Data H63b1q from Host H (S3), CPU 211compares Vibrator Controller Version Data H63b1q with VibratorController Version Data 20663b1q stored in OS Version Data Storage Area20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assumingthat CPU211 detects in S4 that Vibrator Controller Version Data 20663b1qof Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sends a NewVibrator Controller Sending Request, which is received by Host H (S5).Here, the New Vibrator Controller Sending Request is a request to sendVibrator Controller H63OSq (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H toCommunication Device 200. Host H retrieves Vibrator Controller H63OSq(Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version, from OperatingSystem Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controllerto Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving Vibrator ControllerH63OSq from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Vibrator Controller H63OSq asVibrator Controller 20663OSq in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph[0185]) (S8). The old version of Vibrator Controller 20663OSq (Paragraph[0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0231]—This Paragraph [0231] illustrates Video ProcessorController Updating Software H63c1r (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Video Processor Controller Updating Software20663c1r (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateVideo Processor Controller 20663OSr stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves VideoProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1r from OS Version Data StorageArea 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to Host H (S1). Uponreceiving Video Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1r (Paragraph[0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H compares VideoProcessor Controller Version Data 20663b1r (Paragraph [0189]) with VideoProcessor Controller Version Data H63b1r stored in OS Version DataStorage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3). Assuming that HostH detects in S3 that Video Processor Controller Version Data 20663b1r ofCommunication Device 200 is of an old version. Host H retrieves VideoProcessor Controller H63OSr, which is of the latest version, fromOperating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends thecontroller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Upon receiving VideoProcessor Controller H63OSr from Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores VideoProcessor Controller H63OSr as Video Processor Controller 20663OSr inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version ofVideo Processor Controller 20663OSr (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0232]—This Paragraph [0232] illustrates another embodiment ofVideo Processor Controller Updating Software H63c1r (Paragraph [0196])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Video Processor Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1r (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Video Processor Controller 20663OSr stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends a VideoProcessor Controller Update Request, which is received by Host H (S1).Here, the Video Processor Controller Update Request is a request to sendVideo Processor Controller Version Data H63b1r (Paragraph [0195]) storedin Host H to Communication Device 200. In response to the request, HostH retrieves Video Processor Controller Version Data H63b1r from OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), and sends the datato Communication Device 200 (S2). Upon receiving Video ProcessorController Version Data H63b1r from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares VideoProcessor Controller Version Data H63b1r with Video Processor ControllerVersion Data 20663b1r stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1(Paragraph [0189]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming thatCPU211 detects in S4 that Video Processor Controller Version Data20663b1r of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sendsa New Video Processor Controller Sending Request, which is received byHost H (S5). Here, the New Video Processor Controller Sending Request isa request to send Video Processor Controller H63OSr (Paragraph [0192])stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves VideoProcessor Controller H63OSr (Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latestversion, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]),and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Uponreceiving Video Processor Controller H63OSr from Host H (S7), CPU 211stores Video Processor Controller H63OSr as Video Processor Controller20663OSr in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The oldversion of Video Processor Controller 20663OSr (Paragraph [0185]) isdeleted.

Paragraph [0233]—This Paragraph [0233] illustrates Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63c1s (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software20663c1s (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s from OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to Host H(S1). Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s(Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s (Paragraph [0189])with Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1s stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data 20663b1s of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs, which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0192]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSs as Wireless ReceiverController 20663OSs in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S6).The old version of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs (Paragraph[0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0234]—This Paragraph [0234] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63c1s (Paragraph [0196])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1s (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Receiver Controller Update Request#1, which is received by HostH (S1). Here, the Wireless Receiver Controller Update Request#1 is arequest to send Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1s(Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63b1s from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph[0195]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1s from Host H(S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1swith Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) of CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data 20663b1s of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Wireless Receiver ControllerSending Request#1, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the NewWireless Receiver Controller Sending Request#1 is a request to sendWireless Receiver Controller H63OSs (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host Hto Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Wireless ReceiverController H63OSs (Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSs from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSs as Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The old version ofWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSs (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0235]—This Paragraph [0235] illustrates Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63c1t (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software20663c1t (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t from OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to Host H(S1). Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t(Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t (Paragraph [0189])with Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1t stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data 20663b1t of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt, which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0192]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSt as Wireless ReceiverController 20663OSt in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S6).The old version of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt (Paragraph[0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0236]—This Paragraph [0236] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63c1t (Paragraph [0196])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1t (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Receiver Controller Update Request#2, which is received by HostH (S1). Here, the Wireless Receiver Controller Update Request#2 is arequest to send Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1t(Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63b1t from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph[0195]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1t from Host H(S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1twith Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) of CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data 20663b1t of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Wireless Receiver ControllerSending Request#2, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the NewWireless Receiver Controller Sending Request#2 is a request to sendWireless Receiver Controller H63OSt (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host Hto Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Wireless ReceiverController H63OSt (Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSt from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSt as Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The old version ofWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSt (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0237]—This Paragraph [0237] illustrates Wireless ReceiverController Updating Software H63c1u (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller Updating Software20663c1u (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu stored in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u from OS Version DataStorage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to Host H(S1). Upon receiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u(Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host H comparesWireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u (Paragraph [0189])with Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1u stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]) of Host H (S3).Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data 20663b1u of Communication Device 200 is of an old version.Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu, which is of thelatest version, from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph[0192]), and sends the controller to Communication Device 200 (S4). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu from Host H (S5), CPU 211stores Wireless Receiver Controller H63OSu as Wireless ReceiverController 20663OSu in Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S6).The old version of Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu (Paragraph[0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0238]—This Paragraph [0238] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Receiver Controller Updating Software H63c1u (Paragraph [0196])of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Receiver Controller UpdatingSoftware 20663c1u (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, whichupdate Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 sends aWireless Receiver Controller Update Request#3, which is received by HostH (S1). Here, the Wireless Receiver Controller Update Request#3 is arequest to send Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1u(Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200. Inresponse to the request, Host H retrieves Wireless Receiver ControllerVersion Data H63b1u from OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph[0195]), and sends the data to Communication Device 200 (S2). Uponreceiving Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1u from Host H(S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data H63b1uwith Wireless Receiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u stored in OSVersion Data Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) of CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Assuming that CPU211 detects in S4 that WirelessReceiver Controller Version Data 20663b1u of Communication Device 200 isof an old version. CPU 211 sends a New Wireless Receiver ControllerSending Request#3, which is received by Host H (S5). Here, the NewWireless Receiver Controller Sending Request#3 is a request to sendWireless Receiver Controller H63OSu (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host Hto Communication Device 200. Host H retrieves Wireless ReceiverController H63OSu (Paragraph [0192]), which is of the latest version,from Operating System Storage Area H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sendsthe controller to Communication Device 200 (S6). Upon receiving WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSu from Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores WirelessReceiver Controller H63OSu as Wireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The old version ofWireless Receiver Controller 20663OSu (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0239]—This Paragraph [0239] illustrates Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software H63c1v (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663c1v (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1v from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to HostH (S1). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663b1v (Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host Hcompares Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1v(Paragraph [0189]) with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version DataH63b1v stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195])of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1v of Communication Device 200is of an old version. Host H retrieves Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSv, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSvfrom Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSvas Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version of Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSv (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0240]—This Paragraph [0240] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software H63c1v (Paragraph[0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1v (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device200, which update Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200sends a Wireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#1, which isreceived by Host H (S1). Here, the Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdate Request#1 is a request to send Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data H63b1v (Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. In response to the request, Host H retrieves WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data H63b1v from OS Version Data StorageArea H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), and sends the data to CommunicationDevice 200 (S2). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData H63b1v from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless TransmitterController Version Data H63b1v with Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data 20663b1v stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1(Paragraph [0189]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming thatCPU211 detects in S4 that Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663b1v of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sendsa New Wireless Transmitter Controller Sending Request#1, which isreceived by Host H (S5). Here, the New Wireless Transmitter ControllerSending Request#1 is a request to send Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSv (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.Host H retrieves Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSv (Paragraph[0192]), which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S6). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSvfrom Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSvas Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSv in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The old version of Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSv (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0241]—This Paragraph [0241] illustrates Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software H63c1w (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663c1w (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1w from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to HostH (S1). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663b1w (Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host Hcompares Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1w(Paragraph [0189]) with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version DataH63b1w stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195])of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1w of Communication Device 200is of an old version. Host H retrieves Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSw, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSwfrom Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSwas Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version of Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSw (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0242]—This Paragraph [0242] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software H63c1w (Paragraph[0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1w (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device200, which update Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200sends a Wireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#2, which isreceived by Host H (S1). Here, the Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdate Request#2 is a request to send Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data H63b1w (Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. In response to the request, Host H retrieves WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data H63b1w from OS Version Data StorageArea H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), and sends the data to CommunicationDevice 200 (S2). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData H63b1w from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless TransmitterController Version Data H63b1w with Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data 20663b1w stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1(Paragraph [0189]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming thatCPU211 detects in S4 that Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663b1w of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sendsa New Wireless Transmitter Controller Sending Request#2, which isreceived by Host H (S5). Here, the New Wireless Transmitter ControllerSending Request#2 is a request to send Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSw (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.Host H retrieves Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSw (Paragraph[0192]), which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S6). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSwfrom Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSwas Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSw in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The old version of Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSw (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0243]—This Paragraph [0243] illustrates Wireless TransmitterController Updating Software H63c1x (Paragraph [0196]) of Host H(Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software20663c1x (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device 200, which updateWireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx stored in Operating System20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrievesWireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1x from OS VersionData Storage Area 20663b1 (Paragraph [0189]) and sends the data to HostH (S1). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663b1x (Paragraph [0189]) from Communication Device 200 (S2), Host Hcompares Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1x(Paragraph [0189]) with Wireless Transmitter Controller Version DataH63b1x stored in OS Version Data Storage Area H63b1 (Paragraph [0195])of Host H (S3). Assuming that Host H detects in S3 that WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data 20663b1x of Communication Device 200is of an old version. Host H retrieves Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSx, which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S4). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSxfrom Host H (S5), CPU 211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSxas Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S6). The old version of Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSx (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0244]—This Paragraph [0244] illustrates another embodiment ofWireless Transmitter Controller Updating Software H63c1x (Paragraph[0196]) of Host H (Paragraph [0025]) and Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdating Software 20663c1x (Paragraph [0190]) of Communication Device200, which update Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx stored inOperating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) of Communication Device 200.In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200sends a Wireless Transmitter Controller Update Request#3, which isreceived by Host H (S1). Here, the Wireless Transmitter ControllerUpdate Request#3 is a request to send Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data H63b1x (Paragraph [0195]) stored in Host H to CommunicationDevice 200. In response to the request, Host H retrieves WirelessTransmitter Controller Version Data H63b1x from OS Version Data StorageArea H63b1 (Paragraph [0195]), and sends the data to CommunicationDevice 200 (S2). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller VersionData H63b1x from Host H (S3), CPU 211 compares Wireless TransmitterController Version Data H63b1x with Wireless Transmitter ControllerVersion Data 20663b1x stored in OS Version Data Storage Area 20663b1(Paragraph [0189]) of Communication Device 200 (S4). Assuming thatCPU211 detects in S4 that Wireless Transmitter Controller Version Data20663b1x of Communication Device 200 is of an old version. CPU 211 sendsa New Wireless Transmitter Controller Sending Request#3, which isreceived by Host H (S5). Here, the New Wireless Transmitter ControllerSending Request#3 is a request to send Wireless Transmitter ControllerH63OSx (Paragraph [0192]) stored in Host H to Communication Device 200.Host H retrieves Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSx (Paragraph[0192]), which is of the latest version, from Operating System StorageArea H63OS (Paragraph [0192]), and sends the controller to CommunicationDevice 200 (S6). Upon receiving Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSxfrom Host H (S7), CPU 211 stores Wireless Transmitter Controller H63OSxas Wireless Transmitter Controller 20663OSx in Operating System 20663OS(Paragraph [0185]) (S8). The old version of Wireless TransmitterController 20663OSx (Paragraph [0185]) is deleted.

Paragraph [0245]—As another embodiment, each and all data and softwareprograms described in this specification stored in Communication Device200 may be updated in the manner described hereinbefore.

Paragraph [0246]—For the avoidance of doubt, the present function may beutilized to repair the operating system of Communication Device 200,i.e., Operating System 20663OS (Paragraph [0185]) in the form ofdownloading updates.

Paragraph [0247]—<<Automobile Controlling Function>>

Paragraph [0248]—Paragraph [0249] through Paragraph [0290] illustratethe automobile controlling function which enables Communication Device200 to remotely control an automobile in a wireless fashion via Antenna218 (FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0249]—This Paragraph [0249] illustrates the storage areaincluded in Automobile 835, i.e., an automobile or a car. In the presentembodiment, Automobile 835 includes Automobile Controlling InformationStorage Area 83565a of which the data and the software programs storedtherein are described in Paragraph [0251].

Paragraph [0250]—The data and/or the software programs stored inAutomobile Controlling Information Storage Area 83565a (Paragraph[0249]) may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0251]—This Paragraph [0251] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Automobile Controlling Information Storage Area 83565a(Paragraph [0249]). In the present embodiment, Automobile ControllingInformation Storage Area 83565a includes Automobile Controlling DataStorage Area 83565b and Automobile Controlling Software Storage Area83565c. Automobile Controlling Data Storage Area 83565b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of Automobile835 (Paragraph [0249]), such as the ones described in Paragraph throughParagraph [0258]. Automobile Controlling Software Storage Area 83565cstores the software programs necessary to implement the present functionon the side of Automobile 835, such as the ones described in Paragraph[0259].

Paragraph [0252]—This Paragraph [0252] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Automobile Controlling Data Storage Area 83565b (Paragraph[0251]). In the present embodiment, Automobile Controlling Data StorageArea 83565b includes User Access Data Storage Area 83565b1, Window DataStorage Area 83565b2, Door Data Storage Area 83565b3, Radio Channel DataStorage Area 83565b4, TV Channel Data Storage Area 83565b5, Blinker DataStorage Area 83565b6, and Work Area 83565b7. User Access Data StorageArea 83565b1 stores the data described in Paragraph [0253]. Window DataStorage Area 83565b2 stores the data described in Paragraph [0254]. DoorData Storage Area 83565b3 stores the data described in Paragraph [0255].Radio Channel Data Storage Area 83565b4 stores the data described inParagraph [0256]. TV Channel Data Storage Area 83565b5 stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0257]. Blinker Data Storage Area 83565b6 storesthe data described in Paragraph [0258]. Work Area 83565b7 is utilized asa work area to perform calculation and temporarily store data. The datastored in Automobile Controlling Data Storage Area 83565b excluding theones stored in User Access Data Storage Area 83565b1 and Work Area83565b7 are primarily utilized for reinstallation, i.e., to reinstallthe data to Communication Device 200 as described hereinafter in casethe data stored in Communication Device 200 are corrupted or lost.

Paragraph [0253]—This Paragraph [0253] illustrates the data stored inUser Access Data Storage Area 83565b1 (Paragraph [0252]). In the presentembodiment, User Access Data Storage Area 83565b1 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’. Column ‘User ID’ stores the userIDs, and each user ID is an identification of the user of CommunicationDevice 200 authorized to implement the present function. Column‘Password Data’ stores the password data, and each password datarepresents the password set by the user of the corresponding user ID.The password data is composed of alphanumeric data. In the presentembodiment, User Access Data Storage Area 83565b1 stores the followingdata: the user ID ‘User#1’ and the corresponding password data ‘PasswordData#1’; the user ID ‘User#2’ and the corresponding password data‘Password Data#2’; the user ID ‘User#3’ and the corresponding passworddata ‘Password Data#3’; and the user ID ‘User#4’ and the correspondingpassword data ‘Password Data#4’. According to the present example, theusers represented by User#1 through #4 are authorized to implement thepresent function.

Paragraph [0254]—This Paragraph [0254] illustrates the data stored inWindow Data Storage Area 83565b2 (Paragraph [0252]). In the presentembodiment, Window Data Storage Area 83565b2 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘Window ID’ and ‘Window Data’. Column ‘Window ID’ stores thewindow IDs, and each window ID is an identification of the window (notshown) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph [0249]). Column ‘Window Data’ storesthe window data, and each window data is the image data designed to bedisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) which represents the position of thewindow (not shown) of the corresponding window ID. In the presentembodiment, Window Data Storage Area 83565b2 stores the following data:the window ID ‘Window#1’ and the corresponding window data ‘WindowData#1’; the window ID ‘Window#2’ and the corresponding window data‘Window Data#2’; the window ID ‘Window#3’ and the corresponding windowdata ‘Window Data#3’; and the window ID ‘Window#4’ and the correspondingwindow data ‘Window Data#4’. Four windows of Automobile 835 which arerepresented by the window IDs, ‘Window#1’ through ‘Window#4’, areremotely controllable by implementing the present function.

Paragraph [0255]—This Paragraph [0255] illustrates the data stored inDoor Data Storage Area 83565b3 (Paragraph [0252]). In the presentembodiment, Door Data Storage Area 83565b3 comprises two columns, i.e.,‘Door ID’ and ‘Door Data’. Column ‘Door ID’ stores the door IDs, andeach door ID is an identification of the door (not shown) of Automobile835 (Paragraph [0249]). Column ‘Door Data’ stores the door data, andeach door data is the image data designed to be displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) which represents the position of the door (not shown) of thecorresponding door ID. In the present embodiment, Door Data Storage Area83565b3 stores the following data: the door ID ‘Door#1’ and thecorresponding door data ‘Door Data#1’; the door ID ‘Door#2’ and thecorresponding door data ‘Door Data#2’; the door ID ‘Door#3’ and thecorresponding door data ‘Door Data#3’; and the door ID ‘Door#4’ and thecorresponding door data ‘Door Data#4’. Four doors of Automobile 835which are represented by the door IDs, ‘Door#1’ through ‘Door#4’, areremotely controllable by implementing the present function.

Paragraph [0256]—This Paragraph [0256] illustrates the data stored inRadio Channel Data Storage Area 83565b4 (Paragraph [0252]). In thepresent embodiment, Radio Channel Data Storage Area 83565b4 comprisestwo columns, i.e., ‘Radio Channel ID’ and ‘Radio Channel Data’. Column‘Radio Channel ID’ stores the radio channel IDs, and each radio channelID is an identification of the radio channel (not shown) playable by theradio (not shown) installed in Automobile 835 (Paragraph [0249]). Column‘Radio Channel Data’ stores the radio channel data, and each radiochannel data is the image data designed to be displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) which represents the radio channel (not shown) of thecorresponding radio channel ID. In the present embodiment, Radio ChannelData Storage Area 83565b4 stores the following data: the radio channelID ‘Radio Channel#1’ and the corresponding radio channel data ‘RadioChannel Data#1’; the radio channel ID ‘Radio Channel#2’ and thecorresponding radio channel data ‘Radio Channel Data#2’; the radiochannel ID ‘Radio Channel#3’ and the corresponding radio channel data‘Radio Channel Data#3’; and the radio channel ID ‘Radio Channel#4’ andthe corresponding radio channel data ‘Radio Channel Data#4’. Four radiochannels which are represented by the radio channel IDs, ‘RadioChannel#1’ through ‘Radio Channel#4’, are remotely controllable byimplementing the present invention.

Paragraph [0257]—This Paragraph [0257] illustrates the data stored in TVChannel Data Storage Area 83565b5 (Paragraph [0252]). In the presentembodiment, TV Channel Data Storage Area 83565b5 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘TV Channel ID’ and ‘TV Channel Data’. Column ‘TV Channel ID’stores the TV channel IDs, and each TV channel ID is an identificationof the TV channel (not shown) playable by the TV (not shown) installedin Automobile 835 (Paragraph [0249]). Column ‘TV Channel Data’ storesthe TV channel data, and each TV channel data is the image data designedto be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) which represents the TV channel (notshown) of the corresponding TV channel ID. In the present embodiment, TVChannel Data Storage Area 83565b5 stores the following data: the TVchannel ID ‘TV Channel#1’ and the corresponding TV channel data ‘TVChannel Data#1’; the TV channel ID ‘TV Channel#2’ and the correspondingTV channel data ‘TV Channel Data#2’; the TV channel ID ‘TV Channel#3’and the corresponding TV channel data ‘TV Channel Data#3’; and the TVchannel ID ‘TV Channel#4’ and the corresponding TV channel data ‘TVChannel Data#4’. Four TV channels which are represented by the TVchannel IDs, ‘TV Channel#1’ through ‘TV Channel#4’, are remotelycontrollable by implementing the present invention.

Paragraph [0258]—This Paragraph [0258] illustrates the data stored inBlinker Data Storage Area 83565b6 (Paragraph [0252]). In the presentembodiment, Blinker Data Storage Area 83565b6 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘Blinker ID’ and ‘Blinker Data’. Column ‘Blinker ID’ stores theblinker IDs, and each blinker ID is an identification of the blinker(not shown) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph [0249]). Column ‘Blinker Data’stores the blinker data, and each blinker data is the image datadesigned to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) which represents theblinker (not shown) of the corresponding blinker ID. In the presentembodiment, Blinker Data Storage Area 83565b6 stores the following data:the blinker ID ‘Blinker#1’ and the corresponding blinker data ‘BlinkerData#1’; and the blinker ID ‘Blinker#2’ and the corresponding blinkerdata ‘Blinker Data#2’. Two blinkers which are represented by the blinkerIDs, ‘Blinker#1’ and ‘Blinker#2’, are remotely controllable byimplementing the present invention. Here, the blinker (not shown)represented by ‘Blinker#1’ is the right blinker and the blinker (notshown) represented by ‘Blinker#2’ is the left blinker.

Paragraph [0259]—This Paragraph [0259] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Automobile Controlling Software Storage Area 83565c(Paragraph [0251]). In the present embodiment, Automobile ControllingSoftware Storage Area 83565c includes Automobile Controller Storage Area83565c1 and Remote Controlling Software Storage Area 83565c2. AutomobileController Storage Area 83565c1 stores the controllers described inParagraph [0260]. Remote Controlling Software Storage Area 83565c2stores the software programs described in Paragraph [0261].

Paragraph [0260]—This Paragraph [0260] illustrates the controllersstored in Automobile Controller Storage Area 83565c1 (Paragraph [0259]).In the present embodiment, Automobile Controller Storage Area 83565c1stores Engine Controller 83565c1a, Direction Controller 83565c1b, SpeedController 83565c1c, Window Controller 83565c1d, Door Controller83565c1e, Radio Controller 83565c1f, TV Controller 83565c1g, RadioChannel Selector 83565c1h, TV Channel Selector 83565c1i, BlinkerController 83565c1j, Emergency Lamp Controller 83565c1k, Cruise ControlController 83565c1l, and Speaker Volume Controller 83565c1m. EngineController 83565c1a is the controller which controls the engine (notshown) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph [0249]). Direction Controller83565c1b is the controller which controls the steering wheel (not shown)of Automobile 835. Speed Controller 83565c1c is the controller whichcontrols the accelerator (not shown) of Automobile 835. WindowController 83565c1d is the controller which controls the windows (notshown) of Automobile 835. Door Controller 83565c1e is the controllerwhich controls the doors (not shown) of Automobile 835. Radio Controller83565c1f is the controller which controls the radio (not shown) ofAutomobile 835. TV Controller 83565c1g is the controller which controlsthe TV (not shown) of Automobile 835. Radio Channel Selector 83565c1h isthe controller which controls the radio channels (not shown) of theradio (not shown) installed in Automobile 835. TV Channel Selector83565c1i is the controller which controls the radio channels (not shown)of the radio (not shown) installed in Automobile 835. Blinker Controller83565c1j is the controller which controls the blinkers (not shown) ofAutomobile 835. Emergency Lamp Controller 83565c1k is the controllerwhich controls the emergency lamp (not shown) of Automobile 835. CruiseControl Controller 83565c1l is the controller which controls the cruisecontrol (not shown) of Automobile 835. Speaker Volume Controller83565c1m is the controller which controls the speaker (not shown) ofAutomobile 835. As another embodiment, the foregoing controllers may bein the form of hardware instead of software.

Paragraph [0261]—This Paragraph [0261] illustrates the software programsstored in Remote Controlling Software Storage Area 83565c2 (Paragraph[0259]). In the present embodiment, Remote Controlling Software StorageArea 83565c2 stores Engine Controlling Software 83565c2a, DirectionControlling Software 83565c2b, Speed Controlling Software 83565c2c,Window Controlling Software 83565c2d, Door Controlling Software83565c2e, Radio Controlling Software 83565c2f, TV Controlling Software83565c2g, Radio Channel Selecting Software 83565c2h, TV ChannelSelecting Software 83565c2i, Blinker Controlling Software 83565c2j,Emergency Lamp Controlling Software 83565c2k, Cruise Control ControllingSoftware 83565c2l, Speaker Volume Controlling Software 83565c2m,Controller Reinstalling Software 83565c2n, Data Reinstalling Software83565c2o, and User Access Authenticating Software 83565c2p. EngineControlling Software 83565c2a is the software program described inParagraph [0276]. Direction Controlling Software 83565c2b is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0277]. Speed ControllingSoftware 83565c2c is the software program described in Paragraph [0278].Window Controlling Software 83565c2d is the software program describedin Paragraph [0279]. Door Controlling Software 83565c2e is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0280]. Radio Controlling Software83565c2f is the software program described in Paragraph [0281]. TVControlling Software 83565c2g is the software program described inParagraph [0282]. Radio Channel Selecting Software 83565c2h is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0283]. TV Channel SelectingSoftware 83565c2i is the software program described in Paragraph [0284].Blinker Controlling Software 83565c2j is the software program describedin Paragraph [0285]. Emergency Lamp Controlling Software 83565c2k is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0286]. Cruise ControlControlling Software 83565c2l is the software program described inParagraph [0287]. Speaker Volume Controlling Software 83565c2m is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0288]. Controller ReinstallingSoftware 83565c2n is the software program described in Paragraph [0289].Data Reinstalling Software 83565c2o is the software program described inParagraph [0290]. User Access Authenticating Software 83565c2p is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0275]. The controllers storedin Automobile Controller Storage Area 83565c1 primarily functions asdirectly controlling Automobile 835 in the manner described in Paragraph[0260], and the software programs stored in Remote Controlling SoftwareStorage Area 83565c2 controls the controllers stored in AutomobileController Storage Area 83565c1, by cooperating with the softwareprograms stored in Remote Controlling Software Storage Area 20665c2(Paragraph [0274]) of Communication Device 200, in a wireless fashionvia Antenna 218 (FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0262]—This Paragraph [0262] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, RAM 206 includes Automobile Controlling Information StorageArea 20665a of which the data and the software programs stored thereinare described in Paragraph [0264].

Paragraph [0263]—The data and/or the software programs stored inAutomobile Controlling Information Storage Area 20665a (Paragraph[0262]) may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0264]—This Paragraph [0264] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Automobile Controlling Information Storage Area 20665a(Paragraph [0262]). In the present embodiment, Automobile ControllingInformation Storage Area 20665a includes Automobile Controlling DataStorage Area 20665b and Automobile Controlling Software Storage Area20665c. Automobile Controlling Data Storage Area 20665b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function on the side of CommunicationDevice 200, such as the ones described in Paragraph [0265] throughParagraph [0271]. Automobile Controlling Software Storage Area 20665cstores the software programs necessary to implement the present functionon the side of Communication Device 200, such as the ones described inParagraph [0272].

Paragraph [0265]—This Paragraph [0265] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Automobile Controlling Data Storage Area 20665b (Paragraph[0264]). In the present embodiment, Automobile Controlling Data StorageArea 20665b includes User Access Data Storage Area 20665b1, Window DataStorage Area 20665b2, Door Data Storage Area 20665b3, Radio Channel DataStorage Area 20665b4, TV Channel Data Storage Area 20665b5, Blinker DataStorage Area 20665b6, and Work Area 20665b7. User Access Data StorageArea 20665b1 stores the data described in Paragraph [0266]. Window DataStorage Area 20665b2 stores the data described in Paragraph [0267]. DoorData Storage Area 20665b3 stores the data described in Paragraph [0268].Radio Channel Data Storage Area 20665b4 stores the data described inParagraph [0269]. TV Channel Data Storage Area 20665b5 stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0270]. Blinker Data Storage Area 20665b6 storesthe data described in Paragraph [0271]. Work Area 20665b7 is utilized asa work area to perform calculation and temporarily store data.

Paragraph [0266]—This Paragraph [0266] illustrates the data stored inUser Access Data Storage Area 20665b1 (Paragraph [0265]). In the presentembodiment, User Access Data Storage Area 20665b1 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘User ID’ and ‘Password Data’. Column ‘User ID’ stores the user IDwhich is an identification of the user of Communication Device 200.Column ‘Password Data’ stores the password data which represents thepassword set by the user of Communication Device 200. The password datais composed of alphanumeric data. In the present embodiment, User AccessData Storage Area 20665b1 stores the following data: the user ID‘User#1’ and the corresponding password data ‘Password Data#1’.

Paragraph [0267]—This Paragraph [0267] illustrates the data stored inWindow Data Storage Area 20665b2 (Paragraph [0265]). In the presentembodiment, Window Data Storage Area 20665b2 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘Window ID’ and ‘Window Data’. Column ‘Window ID’ stores thewindow IDs, and each window ID is an identification of the window (notshown) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph [0249]). Column ‘Window Data’ storesthe window data, and each window data is the image data designed to bedisplayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) which represents the position of thewindow (not shown) of the corresponding window ID. In the presentembodiment, Window Data Storage Area 20665b2 stores the following data:the window ID ‘Window#1’ and the corresponding window data ‘WindowData#1’; the window ID ‘Window#2’ and the corresponding window data‘Window Data#2’; the window ID ‘Window#3’ and the corresponding windowdata ‘Window Data#3’; and the window ID ‘Window#4’ and the correspondingwindow data ‘Window Data#4’. Four windows of Automobile 835 which arerepresented by the window IDs, ‘Window#1’ through ‘Window#4’, areremotely controllable by implementing the present function.

Paragraph [0268]—This Paragraph [0268] illustrates the data stored inDoor Data Storage Area 20665b3 (Paragraph [0265]). In the presentembodiment, Door Data Storage Area 20665b3 comprises two columns, i.e.,‘Door ID’ and ‘Door Data’. Column ‘Door Data’ stores the door data, andeach door data is the image data designed to be displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) which represents the position of the door (not shown) of thecorresponding door ID. In the present embodiment, Door Data Storage Area20665b3 stores the following data: the door ID ‘Door#1’ and thecorresponding door data ‘Door Data#1’; the door ID ‘Door#2’ and thecorresponding door data ‘Door Data#2’; the door ID ‘Door#3’ and thecorresponding door data ‘Door Data#3’; and the door ID ‘Door#4’ and thecorresponding door data ‘Door Data#4’. Four doors of Automobile 835(Paragraph [0249]) which are represented by the door IDs, ‘Door#1’through ‘Door#4’, are remotely controllable by implementing the presentfunction.

Paragraph [0269]—This Paragraph [0269] illustrates the data stored inRadio Channel Data Storage Area 20665b4 (Paragraph [0265]). In thepresent embodiment, Radio Channel Data Storage Area 20665b4 comprisestwo columns, i.e., ‘Radio Channel ID’ and ‘Radio Channel Data’. Column‘Radio Channel ID’ stores the radio channel IDs, and each radio channelID is an identification of the radio channel (not shown) playable by theradio (not shown) installed in Automobile 835 (Paragraph [0249]). Column‘Radio Channel Data’ stores the radio channel data, and each radiochannel data is the image data designed to be displayed on LCD 201(FIG. 1) which represents the radio channel (not shown) of thecorresponding radio channel ID. In the present embodiment, Radio ChannelData Storage Area 20665b4 stores the following data: the radio channelID ‘Radio Channel#1’ and the corresponding radio channel data ‘RadioChannel Data#1’; the radio channel ID ‘Radio Channel#2’ and thecorresponding radio channel data ‘Radio Channel Data#2’; the radiochannel ID ‘Radio Channel#3’ and the corresponding radio channel data‘Radio Channel Data#3’; and the radio channel ID ‘Radio Channel#4’ andthe corresponding radio channel data ‘Radio Channel Data#4’. Four radiochannels which are represented by the radio channel IDs, ‘RadioChannel#1’ through ‘Radio Channel#4’, are remotely controllable byimplementing the present invention.

Paragraph [0270]—This Paragraph [0270] illustrates the data stored in TVChannel Data Storage Area 20665b5 (Paragraph [0265]). In the presentembodiment, TV Channel Data Storage Area 20665b5 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘TV Channel ID’ and ‘TV Channel Data’. Column ‘TV Channel ID’stores the TV channel IDs, and each TV channel ID is an identificationof the TV channel (not shown) playable by the TV (not shown) installedin Automobile 835 (Paragraph [0249]). Column ‘TV Channel Data’ storesthe TV channel data, and each TV channel data is the image data designedto be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) which represents the TV channel (notshown) of the corresponding TV channel ID. In the present embodiment, TVChannel Data Storage Area 20665b5 stores the following data: the TVchannel ID ‘TV Channel#1’ and the corresponding TV channel data ‘TVChannel Data#1’; the TV channel ID ‘TV Channel#2’ and the correspondingTV channel data ‘TV Channel Data#2’; the TV channel ID ‘TV Channel#3’and the corresponding TV channel data ‘TV Channel Data#3’; and the TVchannel ID ‘TV Channel#4’ and the corresponding TV channel data ‘TVChannel Data#4’. Four TV channels which are represented by the TVchannel IDs, ‘TV Channel#1’ through ‘TV Channel#4’, are remotelycontrollable by implementing the present invention.

Paragraph [0271]—This Paragraph [0271] illustrates the data stored inBlinker Data Storage Area 20665b6 (Paragraph [0265]). In the presentembodiment, Blinker Data Storage Area 20665b6 comprises two columns,i.e., ‘Blinker ID’ and ‘Blinker Data’. Column ‘Blinker ID’ stores theblinker IDs, and each blinker ID is an identification of the blinker(not shown) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph [0249]). Column ‘Blinker Data’stores the blinker data, and each blinker data is the image datadesigned to be displayed on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) which represents theblinker (not shown) of the corresponding blinker ID. In the presentembodiment, Blinker Data Storage Area 20665b6 stores the following data:the blinker ID ‘Blinker#1’ and the corresponding blinker data ‘BlinkerData#1’; and the blinker ID ‘Blinker#2’ and the corresponding blinkerdata ‘Blinker Data#2’. Two blinkers which are represented by the blinkerIDs, ‘Blinker#1’ and ‘Blinker#2’, are remotely controllable byimplementing the present invention. Here, the blinker (not shown)represented by ‘Blinker#1’ is the right blinker and the blinker (notshown) represented by ‘Blinker#2’ is the left blinker.

Paragraph [0272]—This Paragraph [0272] illustrates the storage areasincluded in Automobile Controlling Software Storage Area 20665c(Paragraph [0264]). In the present embodiment, Automobile ControllingSoftware Storage Area 20665c includes Automobile Controller Storage Area20665c1 and Remote Controlling Software Storage Area 20665c2. AutomobileController Storage Area 20665c1 stores the controllers described inParagraph [0273]. Remote Controlling Software Storage Area 20665c2stores the software programs described in Paragraph [0274].

Paragraph [0273]—This Paragraph [0273] illustrates the controllersstored in Automobile Controller Storage Area 20665c1 (Paragraph [0272]).In the present embodiment, Automobile Controller Storage Area 20665c1stores Engine Controller 20665c1a, Direction Controller 20665c1b, SpeedController 20665c1c, Window Controller 20665c1d, Door Controller20665c1e, Radio Controller 20665c1f, TV Controller 20665c1g, RadioChannel Selector 20665c1h, TV Channel Selector 20665c1i, BlinkerController 20665c1j, Emergency Lamp Controller 20665c1k, Cruise ControlController 20665c1l, and Speaker Volume Controller 20665c1m. EngineController 20665c1a is the controller which controls the engine (notshown) of Automobile 206. Direction Controller 20665c1b is thecontroller which controls the steering wheel (not shown) of Automobile206. Speed Controller 20665c1c is the controller which controls theaccelerator (not shown) of Automobile 206. Window Controller 20665c1d isthe controller which controls the windows (not shown) of Automobile 206.Door Controller 20665c1e is the controller which controls the doors (notshown) of Automobile 206. Radio Controller 20665c1f is the controllerwhich controls the radio (not shown) of Automobile 206. TV Controller20665c1g is the controller which controls the TV (not shown) ofAutomobile 206. Radio Channel Selector 20665c1h is the controller whichcontrols the radio channels (not shown) of the radio (not shown)installed in Automobile 206. TV Channel Selector 20665c1i is thecontroller which controls the radio channels (not shown) of the radio(not shown) installed in Automobile 206. Blinker Controller 20665c1j isthe controller which controls the blinkers (not shown) of Automobile206. Emergency Lamp Controller 20665c1k is the controller which controlsthe emergency lamp (not shown) of Automobile 206. Cruise ControlController 20665c1l is the controller which controls the cruise control(not shown) of Automobile 206. Speaker Volume Controller 20665c1m is thecontroller which controls the speaker (not shown) of Automobile 206. Asanother embodiment, the foregoing controllers may be in the form ofhardware instead of software. The data stored in Automobile ControllerStorage Area 20665c1 are primarily utilized for reinstallation, i.e., toreinstall the data to Automobile 835 (Paragraph [0249]) as describedhereinafter in case the data stored in Automobile 835 are corrupted orlost.

Paragraph [0274]—This Paragraph [0274] illustrates the software programsstored in Remote Controlling Software Storage Area 20665c2 (Paragraph[0264]). In the present embodiment, Remote Controlling Software StorageArea 20665c2 stores Engine Controlling Software 20665c2a, DirectionControlling Software 20665c2b, Speed Controlling Software 20665c2c,Window Controlling Software 20665c2d, Door Controlling Software20665c2e, Radio Controlling Software 20665c2f, TV Controlling Software20665c2g, Radio Channel Selecting Software 20665c2h, TV ChannelSelecting Software 20665c2i, Blinker Controlling Software 20665c2j,Emergency Lamp Controlling Software 20665c2k, Cruise Control ControllingSoftware 20665c2l, Speaker Volume Controlling Software 20665c2m,Controller Reinstalling Software 20665c2n, Data Reinstalling Software20665c2o, and User Access Authenticating Software 20665c2p. EngineControlling Software 20665c2a is the software program described inParagraph [0276]. Direction Controlling Software 20665c2b is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0277]. Speed ControllingSoftware 20665c2c is the software program described in Paragraph [0278].Window Controlling Software 20665c2d is the software program describedin Paragraph [0279]. Door Controlling Software 20665c2e is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0280]. Radio Controlling Software20665c2f is the software program described in Paragraph [0281]. TVControlling Software 20665c2g is the software program described inParagraph [0282]. Radio Channel Selecting Software 20665c2h is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0283]. TV Channel SelectingSoftware 20665c2i is the software program described in Paragraph [0284].Blinker Controlling Software 20665c2j is the software program describedin Paragraph [0285]. Emergency Lamp Controlling Software 20665c2k is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0286]. Cruise ControlControlling Software 20665c2l is the software program described inParagraph [0287]. Speaker Volume Controlling Software 20665c2m is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0288]. Controller ReinstallingSoftware 20665c2n is the software program described in Paragraph [0289].Data Reinstalling Software 20665c2o is the software program described inParagraph [0290]. User Access Authenticating Software 20665c2p is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0275]. The controllers storedin Automobile Controller Storage Area 83565c1 primarily functions asdirectly controlling Automobile 835 in the manner described in Paragraph[0260], and the software programs stored in Remote Controlling SoftwareStorage Area 83565c2 (Paragraph [0274]) controls the controllers storedin Automobile Controller Storage Area 83565c1 (Paragraph [0260]), bycooperating with the software programs stored in Remote ControllingSoftware Storage Area 83565c2 (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835, in awireless fashion via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0275]—This Paragraph [0275] illustrates User AccessAuthenticating Software 83565c2p (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835(Paragraph [0249]) and User Access Authenticating Software 20665c2p(Paragraph [0274]) of Communication Device 200, which determine whetherCommunication Device 200 in question is authorized to remotely controlAutomobile 835 by implementing the present function. In the presentembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs the user ID andthe password data by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system. The user ID and the password data are temporarilystored in User Access Data Storage Area 20665b1 (Paragraph [0266]) fromwhich the two data are sent to Automobile 835 (S1). Assume that the userinput ‘User#1’ as the user ID and ‘Password Data#1’ as the passworddata. Upon receiving the user ID and the password data (in the presentexample, User#1 and Password Data#1) from Communication Device 200,Automobile 835 stores the two data in Work Area 83565b7 (Paragraph[0252]) (S2). Automobile 835 then initiates the authentication processto determine whether Communication Device 200 in question is authorizedto remotely control Automobile 835 by referring to the data stored inUser Access Data Storage Area 83565b1 (Paragraph [0253]) (S3). Assumethat the authenticity of Communication Device 200 in question iscleared. Automobile 835 permits Communication Device 200 in question toremotely control Automobile 835 in the manner described hereinafter(S4).

Paragraph [0276]—This Paragraph [0276] illustrates Engine ControllingSoftware 83565c2a (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph[0249]) and Engine Controlling Software 20665c2a (Paragraph [0274]) ofCommunication Device 200, which ignite or turn off the engine (notshown) of Automobile 835. In the present embodiment, the user ofCommunication Device 200 inputs an engine controlling signal byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system. Thesignal is sent to Automobile 835 (S1). Here, the engine controllingsignal indicates either to ignite the engine or turn off the engine.Upon receiving the engine controlling signal from Communication Device200, Automobile 835 stores the signal in Work Area 83565b7 (Paragraph[0252]) (S2). Automobile 835 controls the engine (not shown) via EngineController 83565c1a (Paragraph [0260]) in accordance with the enginecontrolling signal (S3).

Paragraph [0277]—This Paragraph [0277] illustrates Direction ControllingSoftware 83565c2b (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph[0249]) and Direction Controlling Software 20665c2b (Paragraph [0274])of Communication Device 200, which control the direction of Automobile835. In the present embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200inputs a direction controlling signal by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system. The signal is sent toAutomobile 835 (S1). Here, the direction controlling signal indicateseither to move forward, back, left, or right Automobile 835. Uponreceiving the direction controlling signal from Communication Device200, Automobile 835 stores the signal in Work Area 83565b7 (Paragraph[0252]) (S2). Automobile 835 controls the direction via DirectionController 83565c1b (Paragraph [0260]) in accordance with the directioncontrolling signal (S3).

Paragraph [0278]—This Paragraph [0278] illustrates Speed ControllingSoftware 83565c2c (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph[0249]) and Speed Controlling Software 20665c2c (Paragraph [0274]) ofCommunication Device 200, which control the speed of Automobile 835. Inthe present embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs aspeed controlling signal by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system. The signal is sent to Automobile 835 (S1).Here, the speed controlling signal indicates either to increase speed ordecrease speed of Automobile 835. Upon receiving the speed controllingsignal from Communication Device 200, Automobile 835 stores the signalin Work Area 83565b7 (Paragraph [0252]) (S2). Automobile 835 controlsthe speed via Speed Controller 83565c1c (Paragraph [0260]) In accordancethe with speed controlling signal (S3).

Paragraph [0279]—This Paragraph [0279] illustrates Window ControllingSoftware 83565c2d (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph[0249]) and Window Controlling Software 20665c2d (Paragraph [0274]) ofCommunication Device 200, which control the window (not shown) ofAutomobile 835. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves all window data from Window DataStorage Area 20665b2 (Paragraph [0267]) and displays the data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of thewindow data (for example, Window Data#1), and CPU 211 identifies thecorresponding window ID (for example, Window#1) by referring to WindowData Storage Area 20665b2 (Paragraph [0267]) (S2). The user furtherinputs a window controlling signal by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S3). Here, the windowcontrolling signal indicates either to open the window or to close thewindow. CPU 211 sends the window ID and the window controlling signal toAutomobile 835 (S4). Upon receiving the window ID and the windowcontrolling signal from Communication Device 200, Automobile 835 storesboth data in Work Area 83565b7 (Paragraph [0252]) (S5). Automobile 835controls the window identified by the window ID via Window Controller83565c1d (Paragraph [0260]) in accordance with the window controllingsignal (S6).

Paragraph [0280]—This Paragraph [0280] illustrates Door ControllingSoftware 83565c2e (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph[0249]) and Door Controlling Software 20665c2e (Paragraph [0274]) ofCommunication Device 200, which control the door (not shown) ofAutomobile 835. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves all door data from Door Data StorageArea 20665b3 (Paragraph [0268]) and displays the data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of thedoor data (for example, Door Data#1), and CPU 211 identifies thecorresponding door ID (for example, Door#1) by referring to Door DataStorage Area 20665b3 (Paragraph [0268]) (S2). The user further inputs adoor controlling signal by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system. Here, the door controlling signal indicateseither to open the door or to close the door (S3). CPU 211 sends thedoor ID and the door controlling signal to Automobile 835 (S4). Uponreceiving the door ID and the door controlling signal from CommunicationDevice 200, Automobile 835 stores both data in Work Area 83565b7(Paragraph [0252]) (S5). Automobile 835 controls the door identified bythe door ID via Door Controller 83565c1e (Paragraph [0260]) inaccordance with the door controlling signal (S6).

Paragraph [0281]—This Paragraph [0281] illustrates Radio ControllingSoftware 83565c2f (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph[0249]) and Radio Controlling Software 20665c2f (Paragraph [0274]) ofCommunication Device 200, which turn on or turn off the radio (notshown) installed in Automobile 835. In the present embodiment, the userof Communication Device 200 inputs a radio controlling signal, and CPU211 sends the signal to Automobile 835 (S1). Here, the radio controllingsignal indicates either to turn on the radio or to turn off the radio.Upon receiving the radio controlling signal from Communication Device200, Automobile 835 stores the signal in Work Area 83565b7 (Paragraph[0252]) (S2). Automobile 835 controls the radio via Radio Controller83565c1f (Paragraph [0260]) in accordance with the radio controllingsignal (S3).

Paragraph [0282]—This Paragraph [0282] illustrates TV ControllingSoftware 83565c2g (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph[0249]) and TV Controlling Software 20665c2g (Paragraph [0274]) ofCommunication Device 200, which turn on or turn off the TV (not shown)installed in Automobile 835. In the present embodiment, the user ofCommunication Device 200 inputs a TV controlling signal, and CPU 211(FIG. 1) sends the signal to Automobile 835 (S1). Here, the TVcontrolling signal indicates either to turn on the TV or to turn off theTV. Upon receiving the TV controlling signal from Communication Device200, Automobile 835 stores the signal in Work Area 83565b7 (Paragraph[0252]) (S2). Automobile 835 controls the TV via TV Controller 83565c1g(Paragraph [0260]) in accordance with the TV controlling signal (S3).

Paragraph [0283]—This Paragraph [0283] illustrates Radio ChannelSelecting Software 83565c2h (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835(Paragraph [0249]) and Radio Channel Selecting Software 20665c2h(Paragraph [0274]) of Communication Device 200, which select the channelof the radio (not shown) installed in Automobile 835. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves allradio channel data from Radio Channel Data Storage Area 20665b4(Paragraph [0269]) and Displays the data on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). Theuser of Communication Device 200 selects one of the radio channel data(for example, Radio Channel Data#1), and CPU 211 identifies thecorresponding radio channel ID (for example, Radio Channel#1) byreferring to Radio Channel Data Storage Area 20665b4 (Paragraph [0269])(S2). CPU 211 sends the radio channel ID and the radio channelcontrolling signal to Automobile 835 (S3). Here, the radio channelcontrolling signal indicates to change the radio channel to the oneidentified by the radio channel ID. Upon receiving the radio channel IDand the radio channel controlling signal from Communication Device 200,Automobile 835 stores both data in Work Area 83565b7 (Paragraph [0252])(S4). Automobile 835 controls the radio channel of the radio via RadioChannel Selector 83565c1h (Paragraph [0260]) in accordance with theRadio Channel Controlling Signal (S5).

Paragraph [0284]—This Paragraph [0284] illustrates TV Channel SelectingSoftware 83565c2i (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph[0249]) and TV Channel Selecting Software 20665c2i (Paragraph [0274]) ofCommunication Device 200, which select the channel of the TV (not shown)installed in Automobile 835. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1)of Communication Device 200 retrieves all TV channel data from TVChannel Data Storage Area 20665b5 (Paragraph [0270]) and displays thedata on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200selects one of the TV channel data, and CPU 211 identifies thecorresponding TV channel ID (for example, TV Channel#1) by referring toTV Channel Data Storage Area 20665b5 (Paragraph [0270]) (S2). CPU 211sends the TV channel ID and the TV channel controlling signal toAutomobile 835 (S3). Here, the TV channel controlling signal indicatesto change the TV channel to the one identified by the TV channel ID.Upon receiving the TV channel ID and the TV channel controlling signalfrom Communication Device 200, Automobile 835 stores both data in WorkArea 83565b7 (Paragraph [0252]) (S4). Automobile 835 controls the TVChannel via TV Channel Selector 83565c1i (Paragraph [0260]) inaccordance with the TV channel controlling signal (S5).

Paragraph [0285]—This Paragraph [0285] illustrates Blinker ControllingSoftware 83565c2j (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph[0249]) and Blinker Controlling Software 20665c2j (Paragraph [0274]) ofCommunication Device 200, which turn on or turn off the blinker (notshown) of Automobile 835. In the present embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 retrieves all blinker data from Blinker DataStorage Area 20665b6 (Paragraph [0271]) and displays the data on LCD 201(FIG. 1) (S1). The user of Communication Device 200 selects one of theblinker data, and CPU 211 identifies the corresponding blinker ID (forexample Blinker#1) by referring to Blinker Data Storage Area 20665b6(Paragraph [0271]) (S2). CPU 211 sends the blinker ID and the blinkercontrolling signal to Automobile 835 (S3). Here, the blinker controllingsignal indicates either to turn on or turn off the blinker identified bythe blinker ID. Upon receiving the blinker ID and the blinkercontrolling signal from Communication Device 200, Automobile 835 storesboth data in Work Area 83565b7 (Paragraph [0252]) (S4). Automobile 835controls the blinker via Blinker Controller 20665c1j in accordance withthe blinker controlling signal (S5).

Paragraph [0286]—This Paragraph [0286] illustrates Emergency LampControlling Software 83565c2k (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835(Paragraph [0249]) and Emergency Lamp Controlling Software 20665c2k(Paragraph [0274]) of Communication Device 200, which turn on or turnoff the emergency lamp (not shown) installed in Automobile 835. In thepresent embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs anemergency lamp controlling signal, and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) sends the signalto Automobile 835 (S1). Here, the emergency lamp controlling signalindicates either to turn on the emergency lamp or to turn off theemergency lamp. Upon receiving the emergency lamp controlling signalfrom Communication Device 200, Automobile 835 stores the signal in WorkArea 83565b7 (Paragraph [0252]) (S2). Automobile 835 controls theemergency lamp via Emergency Lamp Controller 83565c1k (Paragraph [0260])in accordance with the emergency lamp controlling signal (S3).

Paragraph [0287]—This Paragraph [0287] illustrates Cruise ControlControlling Software 83565c2l (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835(Paragraph [0249]) and Cruise Control Controlling Software 20665c2l(Paragraph [0274]) of Communication Device 200, which turn on or turnoff the cruise control (not shown) of Automobile 835. In the presentembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs a cruise controlcontrolling signal, and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) sends the signal to Automobile835 (S1). Here, the cruise control controlling signal indicates eitherto turn on the cruise control or turn off the cruise control. Uponreceiving the cruise control controlling signal from CommunicationDevice 200, Automobile 835 stores the signal in Work Area 83565b7(Paragraph [0252]) (S2). Automobile 835 controls the cruise control viaCruise Control Controller 83565c1l (Paragraph [0260]) in accordance withthe cruise control controlling signal (S3).

Paragraph [0288]—This Paragraph [0288] illustrates Speaker VolumeControlling Software 83565c2m (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835(Paragraph [0249]) and Speaker Volume Controlling Software 20665c2m(Paragraph [0274]) of Communication Device 200, which raise or lower thevolume of the speaker (not shown) of Automobile 835. In the presentembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs a speaker volumecontrolling signal, and CPU 211 (FIG. 1) sends the signal to Automobile835 (S1). Here, the speaker volume controlling signal indicates eitherto raise the volume or lower the volume of the speaker. Upon receivingthe speaker volume controlling signal from Communication Device 200,Automobile 835 stores the signal in Work Area 83565b7 (Paragraph [0252])(S2). Automobile 835 controls the speaker volume of the speaker viaSpeaker Volume Controller 83565c1m (Paragraph [0260]) in accordance withthe speaker volume controlling signal (S3).

Paragraph [0289]—This Paragraph [0289] illustrates ControllerReinstalling Software 83565c2n (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835(Paragraph [0249]) and Controller Reinstalling Software 20665c2n(Paragraph [0274]) of Communication Device 200, which reinstalls thecontrollers to Automobile Controller Storage Area 83565c1. In thepresent embodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200retrieves all controllers from Automobile Controller Storage Area20665c1, and sends the controllers to Automobile 835 (S1). Uponreceiving the controllers from Communication Device 200, Automobile 835stores the controllers in Work Area 83565b7 (Paragraph [0252]) (S2).Automobile 835 then reinstalls the controllers in Automobile ControllerStorage Area 83565c1 (S3).

Paragraph [0290]—This Paragraph [0290] illustrates Data ReinstallingSoftware 83565c2o (Paragraph [0261]) of Automobile 835 (Paragraph[0249]) and Data Reinstalling Software 20665c2o (Paragraph [0274]) ofCommunication Device 200, which reinstall the data to AutomobileControlling Data Storage Area 20665b. In the present embodiment,Automobile 835 retrieves all data from Automobile Controlling DataStorage Area 83565b, and sends the data to Communication Device 200(S1). Upon receiving the data from Automobile 835, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) ofCommunication Device 200 stores the data in Work Area 20665b7 (S2). CPU211 then reinstalls the data in Automobile Controlling Data Storage Area20665b (S3).

Paragraph [0291]—For the avoidance of doubt, Automobile 835 (Paragraph[0249]) is not limited to an automobile or a car; the present functionmay be implemented with any type of carrier or vehicle, such asairplane, space ship, artificial satellite, space station, train, andmotor cycle.

Paragraph [0292]—<<DVD Remote Controlling Function>>

Paragraph [0293]—Paragraph [0294] through Paragraph [0315] illustrateDVD remote controlling function which enables Communication Device 200to remotely control a DVD player (not shown).

Paragraph [0294]—This Paragraph [0294] illustrates the screen displayedon DVD Monitor DVDM69, a monitor which displays the DVD signal receivedfrom the DVD player, after both DVD Monitor DVDM69 and the DVD playerare powered on. In the present embodiment, DVD Monitor DVDM69 displaysMain Menu MM69 of the movie inserted in the DVD player. In the presentembodiment, Main Menu MM69 is composed of the following menu icons:Chapter Menu Icon MM69a, Language Menu Icon MM69b, Sub-title Menu IconMM69c, and Start Movie Icon MM69d. Chapter Menu Icon MM69a is the iconwhich displays the screen described in Paragraph [0295] upon which saidicon is selected by the user of Communication Device 200. Language MenuIcon MM69b is the icon which displays the screen described in Paragraph[0296] upon which said icon is selected by the user of CommunicationDevice 200. Sub-title Menu Icon MM69c is the icon which displays thescreen described in Paragraph [0297] upon which said icon is selected bythe user of Communication Device 200. Start Movie Icon MM69d is the iconwhich starts the movie inserted in the DVD player (not shown) upon whichsaid icon is selected by the user of Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0295]—This Paragraph [0295] illustrates the screen displayedon DVD Monitor DVDM69 when Chapter Menu Icon MM69a is selected from MainMenu MM69 (Paragraph [0294]). In the present embodiment, DVD MonitorDVDM69 displays Chapter List CL69 of the movie inserted in the DVDplayer. In the present example, Chapter List CL69 is composed of thefollowing chapter icons: Chapter 1 Icon CL69a, Chapter 2 Icon CL69b,Chapter 3 Icon CL69c, Chapter 4 Icon CL69d, Start Movie Icon CL69e, andMain Menu Icon CL69f. Chapter 1 Icon CL69a represents the first chapterof the movie inserted in the DVD player. Chapter 2 Icon CL69b representsthe second chapter of the movie inserted in the DVD player. Chapter 3Icon CL69c represents the third chapter of the movie inserted in the DVDplayer. Chapter 4 Icon CL69d represents the fourth chapter of the movieinserted in the DVD player. Start Movie Icon CL69e is the icon whichstarts, upon which said icon is selected by the user, the movie insertedin the DVD player (not shown) from the chapter represented by the iconselected by the user of Communication Device 200. Assume that the userselects Chapter 3 Icon CL69c from Chapter List CL69. The movie startsfrom the chapter represented by Chapter 3 Icon CL69c thereafter. MainMenu Icon CL69f is the icon which displays the screen described inParagraph [0294] upon which said icon is selected by the user ofCommunication Device 200.

Paragraph [0296]—This Paragraph [0296] illustrates the screen displayedon DVD Monitor DVDM69 when Language Menu Icon MM69b is selected fromMain Menu MM69 (Paragraph [0294]). In the present embodiment, DVDMonitor DVDM69 displays Language List LL69 of the movie inserted in theDVD player. In the present embodiment, Language List LL69 is composed ofthe following language icons: English Icon LL69a, Japanese Icon LL69b,French Icon LL69c, and Main Menu Icon LL69d. English Icon LL69a is theicon which plays the movie inserted in the DVD player (not shown) inEnglish upon which said icon is selected by the user of CommunicationDevice 200. Japanese Icon LL69b is the icon which plays the movieinserted in the DVD player (not shown) in Japanese upon which said iconis selected by the user of Communication Device 200. French Icon LL69cis the icon which plays the movie inserted in the DVD player (not shown)in French upon which said icon is selected by the user of CommunicationDevice 200. Main Menu Icon LL69d is the icon which displays the screendescribed in Paragraph [0294] upon which said icon is selected by theuser of Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0297]—This Paragraph [0297] illustrates the screen displayedon DVD Monitor DVDM69 when Sub-title Menu Icon MM69c is selected fromMain Menu MM69 (Paragraph [0294]). In the present embodiment, DVDMonitor DVDM69 displays Sub-title List StL69 of the movie inserted inthe DVD player. In the present embodiment, Sub-title List StL69 iscomposed of the following sub-title icons: English Icon StL69a, JapaneseIcon StL69b, French Icon StL69c, Sub-title OFF Icon StL69d, and MainMenu Icon StL69e. English Icon StL69a is the icon which displays thesub-titles in English while played of the movie inserted in the DVDplayer (not shown) upon which said icon is selected by the user ofCommunication Device 200. Japanese Icon StL69b is the icon whichdisplays the sub-titles in Japanese while played of the movie insertedin the DVD player (not shown) upon which said icon is selected by theuser of Communication Device 200. French Icon StL69c is the icon whichdisplays the sub-titles in French while played of the movie inserted inthe DVD player (not shown) upon which said icon is selected by the userof Communication Device 200. Sub-title OFF Icon StL69d is the icon whichdisplays no sub-title while played of the movie upon which said icon isselected by the user of Communication Device 200. Main Menu Icon StL69eis the icon which displays the screen described in Paragraph [0294] uponwhich said icon is selected by the user of Communication Device 200.

Paragraph [0298]—This Paragraph [0298] illustrates the storage areaincluded in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200. In the presentembodiment, RAM 206 includes DVD Remote Controlling Information StorageArea 20669a of which the data and the software programs stored thereinare described in Paragraph [0300].

Paragraph [0299]—The data and/or the software programs stored in DVDRemote Controlling Information Storage Area 20669a (Paragraph [0298])may be downloaded from Host H (Paragraph [0025]).

Paragraph [0300]—This Paragraph [0300] illustrates the storage areasincluded in DVD Remote Controlling Information Storage Area 20669a(Paragraph [0298]). In the present embodiment, DVD Remote ControllingInformation Storage Area 20669a includes DVD Remote Controlling DataStorage Area 20669b and DVD Remote Controlling Software Storage Area20669c. DVD Remote Controlling Data Storage Area 20669b stores the datanecessary to implement the present function, such as the ones describedin Paragraph [0301] through Paragraph [0303]. DVD Remote ControllingSoftware Storage Area 20669c stores the software programs necessary toimplement the present function, such as the ones described in Paragraph[0304].

Paragraph [0301]—This Paragraph [0301] illustrates the storage areasincluded in DVD Remote Controlling Data Storage Area 20669b (Paragraph[0300]). In the present embodiment, DVD Remote Controlling Data StorageArea 20669b includes DVD Player Type Data Storage Area 20669b1 and WorkArea 20669b2. DVD Player Type Data Storage Area 20669b1 stores the datadescribed in Paragraph [0302]. Work Area 20669b2 is utilized as a workarea to perform calculation and temporarily store data.

Paragraph [0302]—This Paragraph [0302] illustrates the data stored inDVD Player Type Data Storage Area 20669b1 (Paragraph [0301]). In thepresent embodiment, DVD Player Type Data Storage Area 20669b1 comprisestwo columns, i.e., ‘DVD Player Type ID’ and ‘DVD Player Type Data’.Column ‘DVD Player Type ID’ stores the DVD player type IDs, and each DVDplayer ID is an identification of the DVD player type data stored incolumn ‘DVD Player Type Data’. Each DVD player ID is the name of the DVDplayer manufacturer. Column ‘DVD Player Type Data’ stores the DVD playertype data, and each DVD player type data is a package of signalsdesigned to be sent to the DVD player (not shown) in a wireless fashionvia Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) or LED 219 (not shown). In the presentembodiment, DVD Player Type Data Storage Area 20669b1 stores thefollowing data: DVD player type ID ‘DVD Player Type#1’ and thecorresponding DVD player type Data ‘DVD Player Type Data#1’; DVD playertype ID ‘DVD Player Type#2’ and the corresponding DVD player type Data‘DVD Player Type Data#2’; DVD player type ID ‘DVD Player Type#3’ and thecorresponding DVD player type Data ‘DVD Player Type Data#3’; and DVDplayer type ID ‘DVD Player Type#4’ and the corresponding DVD player typeData ‘DVD Player Type Data#4’. Here, DVD Player Type#1 represents Sony;DVD Player Type#2 represents Samsung; DVD Player Type#3 represents NEC;and DVD Player Type#4 represents Mitsubishi. DVD Player Type Data#1 is apackage of signals designed to be sent to the DVD player manufactured bySony in a wireless fashion via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) or LED 219 (notshown). DVD Player Type Data#2 is a package of signals designed to besent to the DVD player manufactured by Samsung in a wireless fashion viaAntenna 218 (FIG. 1) or LED 219 (not shown). DVD Player Type Data#3 is apackage of signals designed to be sent to the DVD player manufactured byNEC in a wireless fashion via Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) or LED 219 (notshown). DVD Player Type Data#4 is a package of signals designed to besent to the DVD player manufactured by Mitsubishi in a wireless fashionvia Antenna 218 (FIG. 1) or LED 219 (not shown). Each DVD player typedata includes the following data: power on signal, power off signal,main menu displaying signal, main menu selecting signal, chapter menuselecting signal, chapter selecting signal, movie starting signal, soundmenu selecting signal, sound selecting signal, sub-title menu selectingsignal, and sub-title selecting signal. The details of each signal isdescribed in the next paragraph.

Paragraph [0303]—This Paragraph [0303] illustrates the signals includedin DVD Player Type Data#1 stored in DVD Player Type Data Storage Area20669b1 (Paragraph [0302]), for example. As described in the presentparagraph, DVD Player Type Data#1 includes Power ON Signal#1, Power OFFSignal#1, Main Menu Displaying Signal#1, Chapter Menu SelectingSignal#1, Chapter Selecting Signal#1, Movie Starting Signal#1, LanguageMenu Selecting Signal#1, Language Selecting Signal#1, Sub-title MenuSelecting Signal#1, and Sub-title Selecting Signal#1. Power ON Signal#1is the wireless signal which instructs the DVD player of thecorresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony) to turn on its power. Power OFFSignal#1 is the wireless signal which instructs the DVD player of thecorresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony) to turn off its power. Main MenuDisplaying Signal#1 is the wireless signal which instructs the DVDplayer of the corresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony) to display MainMenu MM69 (Paragraph [0294]). Chapter Menu Selecting Signal#1 is thewireless signal which instructs the DVD player of the correspondingmanufacturer (i.e., Sony) to select Chapter Menu Icon MM69a (Paragraph[0294]) and display Chapter List CL69 (Paragraph [0295]). ChapterSelecting Signal#1 is the wireless signal which instructs the DVD playerof the corresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony) to select one of thechapter icons from Chapter List CL69 (Paragraph [0295]). Movie StartingSignal#1 is the wireless signal which instructs the DVD player of thecorresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony) to start the movie from thechapter represented by the chapter icon identified by Chapter SelectingSignal#1. Language Menu Selecting Signal#1 is the wireless signal whichinstructs the DVD player of the corresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony)to select Language Menu Icon MM69b (Paragraph [0294]) and displayLanguage List LL69 (Paragraph [0296]). Language Selecting Signal#1 isthe wireless signal which instructs the DVD player of the correspondingmanufacturer (i.e., Sony) to select one of the sound icons from LanguageList LL69 (Paragraph [0296]). Sub-title Menu Selecting Signal#1 is thewireless signal which instructs the DVD player of the correspondingmanufacturer (i.e., Sony) to select Sub-title Menu Icon MM69c (Paragraph[0294]) and display Sub-title List StL69 (Paragraph [0297]). Sub-titleSelecting Signal#1 is the wireless signal which instructs the DVD playerof the corresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony) to select one of thesub-title icons from Sub-title List StL69 (Paragraph [0297]).

Paragraph [0304]—This Paragraph [0304] illustrates the software programsstored in DVD Remote Controlling Software Storage Area 20669c (Paragraph[0300]). In the present embodiment, DVD Remote Controlling SoftwareStorage Area 20669c stores DVD Player Type Selecting Software 20669c1,DVD Power ON Software 20669c2, DVD Power OFF Software 20669c3, Main MenuDisplaying Software 20669c4, Chapter Menu Selecting Software 20669c5,Chapter Selecting Software 20669c6, Movie Starting Software 20669c7,Language Menu Selecting Software 20669c8, Language Selecting Software20669c9, Sub-title Menu Selecting Software 20669c10. DVD Player TypeSelecting Software 20669c1 is the software program described inParagraph [0305]. DVD Power ON Software 20669c2 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0306]. DVD Power OFF Software 20669c3 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0307]. Main Menu DisplayingSoftware 20669c4 is the software program described in Paragraph [0308].Chapter Menu Selecting Software 20669c5 is the software programdescribed in Paragraph [0309]. Chapter Selecting Software 20669c6 is thesoftware program described in Paragraph [0310]. Movie Starting Software20669c7 is the software program described in Paragraph [0311]. LanguageMenu Selecting Software 20669c8 is the software program described inParagraph [0312]. Language Selecting Software 20669c9 is the softwareprogram described in Paragraph [0313]. Sub-title Menu Selecting Software20669c10 is the software program described in Paragraph [0314].Sub-title Selecting Software 20669c11 is the software program describedin Paragraph [0315].

Paragraph [0305]—This Paragraph [0305] illustrates DVD Player TypeSelecting Software 20669c1 (Paragraph [0304]) of Communication Device200, which selects the DVD player type of the DVD player. In the presentembodiment, CPU 211 (FIG. 1) of Communication Device 200 retrieves allDVD Player Type IDs from DVD Player Type Data Storage Area 20669b1(Paragraph [0302]) (S1), and displays a list of DVD player type IDs onLCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S2). The user of Communication Device 200 selects aDVD player type ID by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S3). CPU 211 retrieves the corresponding DVD playertype data, and stores the data in Work Area 20669b2 (Paragraph [0301])(S4). Assume that the DVD player ID selected in S3 is DVD Player Type#1(i.e., Sony) and DVD Player Type Data#1 is stored in Work Area 20669b2in S4 for purposes of explaining the software programs hereinafter.

Paragraph [0306]—This Paragraph [0306] illustrates DVD Power ON Software20669c2 (Paragraph [0304]) of Communication Device 200, which sendsPower ON Signal#1, i.e., the wireless signal which instructs the DVDplayer of the corresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony) to turn on itspower. In the present embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200inputs a power ON command by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or viavoice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves Power ONSignal#1 from Work Area 20669b2 (Paragraph [0301]) (S2), and sends PowerON Signal#1 to the DVD player (S3).

Paragraph [0307]—This Paragraph [0307] illustrates DVD Power OFFSoftware 20669c3 (Paragraph [0304]) of Communication Device 200, whichsends Power OFF Signal#1, i.e., the wireless signal which instructs theDVD player of the corresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony) to turn offits power. In the present embodiment, the user of Communication Device200 inputs a power OFF command by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) orvia voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves Power OFFSignal#1 from Work Area 20669b2 (Paragraph [0301]) (S2), and sends PowerOFF Signal#1 to the DVD player (S3).

Paragraph [0308]—This Paragraph [0308] illustrates Main Menu DisplayingSoftware 20669c4 (Paragraph [0304]) of Communication Device 200, whichsends Main Menu Displaying Signal#1, i.e., the wireless signal whichinstructs the DVD player of the corresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony)to display Main Menu MM69 (Paragraph [0294]). In the present embodiment,the user of Communication Device 200 inputs a main menu displayingcommand by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves Main Menu Displaying Signal#1from Work Area 20669b2 (Paragraph [0301]) (S2), and sends Main MenuDisplaying Signal#1 to the DVD player (S3).

Paragraph [0309]—This Paragraph [0309] illustrates Chapter MenuSelecting Software 20669c5 (Paragraph [0304]) of Communication Device200, which sends Chapter Menu Selecting Signal#1, i.e., the wirelesssignal which instructs the DVD player of the corresponding manufacturer(i.e., Sony) to select Chapter Menu Icon MM69a (Paragraph [0294]) anddisplay Chapter List CL69 (Paragraph [0295]). In the present embodiment,the user of Communication Device 200 inputs a chapter menu selectingcommand by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves Chapter Menu Selecting Signal#1from Work Area 20669b2 (Paragraph [0301]) (S2), and sends Chapter MenuSelecting Signal#1 to the DVD player (S3).

Paragraph [0310]—This Paragraph [0310] illustrates Chapter SelectingSoftware 20669c6 (Paragraph [0304]) of Communication Device 200, whichsends Chapter Selecting Signal#1, i.e., the wireless signal whichinstructs the DVD player of the corresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony)to select one of the chapter icons from Chapter List LL69 (Paragraph[0295]). In the present embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200inputs a chapter selecting command by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)retrieves Chapter Selecting Signal#1 from Work Area 20669b2 (Paragraph[0301]) (S2), and sends Chapter Selecting Signal#1 to the DVD player(S3).

Paragraph [0311]—This Paragraph [0311] illustrates Movie StartingSoftware 20669c7 (Paragraph [0304]) of Communication Device 200, whichsends Movie Starting Signal#1, i.e., the wireless signal which instructsthe DVD player of the corresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony) to startthe movie from the chapter represented by the chapter icon identified byChapter Selecting Signal#1. In the present embodiment, the user ofCommunication Device 200 inputs a movie starting command by utilizingInput Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) retrieves Movie Starting Signal#1 from Work Area 20669b2(Paragraph [0301]) (S2), and sends Movie Starting Signal#1 to the DVDplayer (S3).

Paragraph [0312]—This Paragraph [0312] illustrates Language MenuSelecting Software 20669c8 (Paragraph [0304]) of Communication Device200, which sends Language Menu Selecting Signal#1, i.e., the wirelesssignal which instructs the DVD player of the corresponding manufacturer(i.e., Sony) to select Language Menu Icon MM69b (Paragraph [0294]) anddisplay Language List LL69 (Paragraph [0296]). In the presentembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs a language menuselecting command by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves Language MenuSelecting Signal#1 from Work Area 20669b2 (Paragraph [0301]) (S2), andsends Language Menu Selecting Signal#1 to the DVD player (S3).

Paragraph [0313]—This Paragraph [0313] illustrates Language SelectingSoftware 20669c9 (Paragraph [0304]) of Communication Device 200, whichsends Language Selecting Signal#1, i.e., the wireless signal whichinstructs the DVD player of the corresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony)to select one of the sound icons from Language List LL69 (Paragraph[0296]). In the present embodiment, the user of Communication Device 200inputs a language selecting command by utilizing Input Device 210(FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1)retrieves Language Selecting Signal#1 from Work Area 20669b2 (Paragraph[0301]) (S2), and sends Language Selecting Signal#1 to the DVD player(S3).

Paragraph [0314]—This Paragraph [0314] illustrates Sub-title MenuSelecting Software 20669c10 (Paragraph [0304]) of Communication Device200, which sends Sub-title Menu Selecting Signal#1, i.e., the wirelesssignal which instructs the DVD player of the corresponding manufacturer(i.e., Sony) to select Sub-title Menu Icon MM69c (Paragraph [0294]) anddisplay Sub-title List StL69 (Paragraph [0297]). In the presentembodiment, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs a sub-title menuselecting command by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voicerecognition system (S1). CPU 211 (FIG. 1) retrieves Sub-title MenuSelecting Signal#1 from Work Area 20669b2 (Paragraph [0301]) (S2), andsends Sub-title Menu Selecting Signal#1 to the DVD player (S3).

Paragraph [0315]—This Paragraph [0315] illustrates Sub-title SelectingSoftware 20669c11 (Paragraph [0304]) of Communication Device 200, whichsends Sub-title Selecting Signal#1, i.e., the wireless signal whichinstructs the DVD player of the corresponding manufacturer (i.e., Sony)to select one of the sub-title icons from Sub-title List StL69(Paragraph [0297]). In the present embodiment, the user of CommunicationDevice 200 inputs a sub-title selecting command by utilizing InputDevice 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition system (S1). CPU 211(FIG. 1) retrieves Sub-title Selecting Signal#1 from Work Area 20669b2(Paragraph [0301]) (S2), and sends Sub-title Selecting Signal#1 to theDVD player (S3).

Paragraph [0316]—<<Multiple Mode Implementing Function>>

Paragraph [0317]—Paragraph [0318] through Paragraph [0323] illustratethe multiple mode implementing function of Communication Device 200which enables to activate and implement a plurality of modes, functions,and/or systems described in this specification simultaneously.

Paragraph [0318]—This Paragraph [0318] illustrates the software programsstored in RAM 206 (FIG. 1) to implement the multiple mode implementingfunction (FIG. 1). As described in Paragraph [0318], RAM 206 includesMultiple Mode Implementer Storage Area 20690a. Multiple Mode ImplementerStorage Area 20690a stores Multiple Mode Implementer 20690b, Mode ListDisplaying Software 20690c, Mode Selecting Software 20690d, ModeActivating Software 20690e, and Mode Implementation Repeater 20690f, allof which are software programs. Multiple Mode Implementer 20690badministers the overall implementation of the present function. One ofthe major tasks of Multiple Mode Implementer 20690b is to administer andcontrol the timing and sequence of Mode List Displaying Software 20690c,Mode Selecting Software 20690d, Mode Activating Software 20690e, andMode Implementation Repeater 20690f. For example, Multiple ModeImplementer 20690b executes them in the following order: Mode ListDisplaying Software 20690c, Mode Selecting Software 20690d, ModeActivating Software 20690e, and Mode Implementation Repeater 20690f.Mode List Displaying Software 20690c displays on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) a listof a certain amount or all modes, functions, and/or systems explained inthis specification of which the sequence is explained in Paragraph[0319]. Mode Selecting Software 20690d selects a certain amount or allmodes, functions, and/or systems explained in this specification ofwhich the sequence is explained in Paragraph [0320]. Mode ActivatingSoftware 20690e activates a certain amount or all modes, functions,and/or systems selected by the Mode Selecting Software 20690d of whichthe sequence is explained in Paragraph [0321]. Mode ImplementationRepeater 20690f executes Multiple Mode Implementer 20690b whichreactivates Mode List Displaying Software 20690c, Mode SelectingSoftware 20690d, Mode Activating Software 20690e of which the sequenceis explained in Paragraph [0322].

Paragraph [0319]—This Paragraph [0319] illustrates the sequence of ModeList Displaying Software 20690c (Paragraph [0318]). Referring toParagraph [0319], CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode ListDisplaying Software 20690c, displays a list of a certain amount or allmodes, functions, and/or systems described in this specification on LCD201 (FIG. 1).

Paragraph [0320]—This Paragraph [0320] illustrates the sequence of ModeSelecting Software 20690d (Paragraph [0318]). Referring to Paragraph[0320], the user of Communication Device 200 inputs an input signal byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition systemidentifying one of the modes, functions, and/or systems displayed on LCD201 (FIG. 1) (S1), and CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of ModeSelecting Software 20690d, interprets the input signal and selects thecorresponding mode, function, or system (S2).

Paragraph [0321]—This Paragraph [0321] illustrates the sequence of ModeActivating Software 20690e (Paragraph [0318]). Referring to Paragraph[0321], CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command of Mode Activating Software20690e, activates the mode, function, or, system selected in S2 ofParagraph [0320]. CPU 211 thereafter implements the activated mode,function, or system as described in the relevant paragraphs in thisspecification.

Paragraph [0322]—This Paragraph [0322] illustrates the sequence of ModeImplementation Repeater 20690f (Paragraph [0318]). Referring toParagraph [0322], the user of Communication Device 200 inputs an inputsignal by utilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognitionsystem (S1). Once the activation of the selected mode, function, orsystem described in Paragraph [0321] hereinbefore is completed, and ifthe input signal indicates to repeat the process to activate anothermode, function, or system (S2), CPU 211 (FIG. 1), under the command ofMode Implementation Repeater 20690f, executes Multiple Mode Implementer20690b (Paragraph [0318]), which reactivates Mode List DisplayingSoftware 20690c (Paragraph [0318]), Mode Selecting Software 20690d(Paragraph [0318]), and Mode Activating Software 20690e (Paragraph[0318]) to activate the second mode, function, or system while the firstmode, function, or system is implemented by utilizing the method ofso-called ‘time sharing’ (S3). Mode List Displaying Software 20690c,Mode Selecting Software 20690d, and Mode Activating Software 20690e canbe repeatedly executed until all modes, function, and systems displayedon LCD 201 (FIG. 1) are selected and activated. The activation of modes,functions, and/or systems is not repeated if the input signal explainedin S2 so indicates.

Paragraph [0323]—As another embodiment, Multiple Mode Implementer20690b, Mode List Displaying Software 20690c, Mode Selecting Software20690d, Mode Activating Software 20690e, and Mode ImplementationRepeater 20690f described in Paragraph [0318] may be integrated into onesoftware program, Multiple Mode Implementer 20690b, as described inParagraph [0323]. Referring to Paragraph [0323], CPU 211 (FIG. 1), firstof all, displays a list of a certain amount or all modes, functions,and/or systems described in this specification on LCD 201 (FIG. 1) (S1).Next, the user of Communication Device 200 inputs an input signal byutilizing Input Device 210 (FIG. 1) or via voice recognition systemidentifying one of the modes, functions, and/or systems displayed on LCD201 (S2), and CPU 211 interprets the input signal and selects thecorresponding mode, function, or system (S3). CPU 211 activates themode, function, or system selected in S3, and thereafter implements theactivated mode, function, or system as described in the relevantparagraphs in this specification (S4). Once the activation of theselected mode, function, or system described in S4 is completed, theuser of Communication Device 200 inputs an input signal by utilizingInput Device 210 or via voice recognition system (S5). If the inputsignal indicates to repeat the process to activate another mode,function, or system (S6), CPU 211 repeats the steps S1 through S4 toactivate the second mode, function, or system while the first mode,function, or system is implemented by utilizing the method so-called‘time sharing’. The steps of S1 though S4 can be repeatedly executeduntil all modes, function, and systems displayed on LCD 201 are selectedand activated. The activation of modes, functions, and/or systems is notrepeated if the input signal explained in S5 so indicates. As anotherembodiment, before or at the time one software program is activated, CPU211 may, either automatically or manually (i.e., by a signal input bythe user of Communication Device), terminate the other software programsalready activated or prohibit other software programs to be activatedwhile one software program is implemented in order to save the limitedspace of RAM 206, thereby allowing only one software program implementedat a time. For the avoidance of doubt, the meaning of each term‘mode(s)’, ‘function(s)’, and ‘system(s)’ is equivalent to the others inthis specification. Namely, the meaning of ‘mode(s)’ includes and isequivalent to that of ‘function(s)’ and ‘system(s)’, the meaning of‘function(s)’ includes and is equivalent to that of ‘mode(s)’ and‘system(s)’, and the meaning of ‘system(s)’ includes and is equivalentto that of ‘mode(s)’ and ‘function(s)’. Therefore, even only mode(s) isexpressly utilized in this specification, it impliedly includesfunction(s) and/or system(s) by its definition.

Paragraph [0324]—<<Incorporation By Reference>>

Paragraph [0325]—All paragraphs and drawings described in U.S. Ser. No.10/711,265, filed 2004-09-07, are incorporated to this application byreference, particularly the following: the preamble described inparagraph [2149] (no drawings); Communication Device 200 (VoiceCommunication Mode) described in paragraphs [2150] through [2155] (FIGS.1 through 2c); Voice Recognition System described in paragraphs [2156]through [2188] (FIGS. 3 through 19); Positioning System described inparagraphs [2189] through [2220] (FIGS. 20a through 32e); Auto BackupSystem described in paragraphs [2221] through [2230] (FIGS. 33 through37); Signal Amplifier described in paragraphs [2231] through [2236](FIG. 38); Audio/Video Data Capturing System described in paragraphs[2237] through [2249] (FIGS. 39 through 44b); Digital Mirror Function(1) described in paragraphs [2250] through [2258] (FIGS. 44c through44e); Caller ID System described in paragraphs through [2266] (FIGS. 45through 47); Stock Purchasing Function described in paragraphs [2267]through [2276] (FIGS. 48 through 52); Timer Email Function described inparagraphs [2277] through (FIGS. 53a and 53b); Call Blocking Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2284] through [2297] (FIGS. 54 through 59);Online Payment Function described in paragraphs [2298] through [2307](FIGS. 60 through 64); Navigation System described in paragraphs [2308]through [2330] (FIGS. 65 through 74a); Remote Controlling Systemdescribed in paragraphs [2331] through [2349] (FIGS. 75 through 85);Auto Emergency Calling System described in paragraphs [2350] through[2358] (FIGS. 86 and 87); Cellular TV Function described in paragraphs[2359] through [2443] (FIGS. 88 through 135); 3D Video Game Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2444] through [2456] (FIGS. 136 through 144);Digital Mirror Function (2) described in paragraphs [2457] through[2466] (FIGS. 145 through 155); Voice Recognition Sys—E-mail (2)described in paragraphs [2467] through [2475] (FIGS. 156 through 160);Positioning System—GPS Search Engine described in paragraphs [2476]through [2518] (FIGS. 161 through 182); Mobile Ignition Key Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2519] through [2541] (FIGS. 183 through 201);Voice Print Authentication System described in paragraphs [2542] through[2552] (FIGS. 202 through 211); Fingerprint Authentication Systemdescribed in paragraphs [2553] through [2565] (FIGS. 212 through 221);Auto Time Adjust Function described in paragraphs [2566] through [2570](FIGS. 222 through 224); Video/Photo Mode described in paragraphs [2571]through [2599] (FIGS. 225 through 242); Call Taxi Function described inparagraphs [2600] through [2640] (FIGS. 243 through 269); Shooting VideoGame Function described in paragraphs [2641] through [2657] (FIGS. 270through 283); Driving Video Game Function described in paragraphs [2658]through [2671] (FIGS. 284 through 294); Address Book Updating Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2672] through [2692] (FIGS. 295 through 312);Batch Address Book Updating Function—With Host described in paragraphs[2693] through (FIGS. 313 through 329); Batch Address Book UpdatingFunction—Peer-To-Peer Connection described in paragraphs [2715] through[2719] (FIGS. 329a through 329c); Batch Scheduler Updating Function—WithHost described in paragraphs [2720] through [2743] (FIGS. 330 through350); Batch Scheduler Updating Function—Peer-To-Peer Connectiondescribed in paragraphs [2744] through (FIGS. 351 and 352); CalculatorFunction described in paragraphs [2749] through [2754] (FIGS. 353through 356); Spreadsheet Function described in paragraphs [2755]through [2762] (FIGS. 357 through 360); Word Processing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2763] through [2778] (FIGS. 361 through 373);TV Remote Controller Function described in paragraphs [2779] through[2801] (FIGS. 374 through 394); CD/PC Inter-communicating Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2802] through [2826] (FIGS. 413 through 427);PDWR Sound Selecting Function described in paragraphs [2827] through(FIGS. 428 through 456); Start Up Software Function described inparagraphs [2864] through (FIGS. 457 through 466); Another Embodiment OfCommunication Device 200 described in paragraphs [2881] through [2885](FIGS. 467a through 467d); Stereo Audio Data Output Function describedin paragraphs [2886] through [2905] (FIGS. 468 through 479); StereoVisual Data Output Function described in paragraphs [2906] through[2925] (FIGS. 480 through 491); Multiple Signal Processing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [2926] through [2998] (FIGS. 492 through 529);Positioning System—Pin-pointing Function described in paragraphs [2999]through [3032] (FIGS. 530 through 553); Artificial Satellite Hostdescribed in paragraphs [3033] through [3051] (FIGS. 554 through 567);CCD Bar Code Reader Function described in paragraphs [3052] through[3073] (FIGS. 568 through 579); Online Renting Function described inparagraphs [3074] through [3151] (FIGS. 580 through 633); SOS CallingFunction described in paragraphs [3152] through [3172] (FIGS. 634through 645); Input Device described in paragraphs [3173] through [3178](FIGS. 646 through 650); PC Remote Controlling Function described inparagraphs [3179] through [3214] (FIGS. 651 through 670); PC RemoteDownloading Function described in paragraphs [3215] through [3264](FIGS. 671 through 701); Audiovisual Playback Function described inparagraphs [3265] through [3290] (FIGS. 702 through 716); Audio PlaybackFunction described in paragraphs [3291] through [3315] (FIGS. 717through 731); Ticket Purchasing Function described in paragraphs [3316]through [3345] (FIGS. 732 through 753); Remote Data Erasing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3346] through [3375] (FIGS. 754 through 774);Business Card Function described in paragraphs [3376] through [3392](FIGS. 775 through 783); Game Vibrating Function described in paragraphs[3393] through [3403] (FIGS. 784 through 786); Part-time Job FindingFunction described in paragraphs [3404] through [3424] (FIGS. 787through 801); Parking Lot Finding Function described in paragraphs[3425] through [3464] (FIGS. 802 through 832); Parts UpgradableCommunication Device described in paragraphs [3465] through [3490](FIGS. 833a through 833x); On Demand TV Function described in paragraphs[3491] through [3521] (FIGS. 834 through 855); Inter-communicating TVFunction described in paragraphs [3522] through [3556] (FIGS. 856through 882); Display Controlling Function described in paragraphs[3557] through [3574] (FIGS. 883 through 894); Multiple PartyCommunicating Function described in paragraphs [3575] through [3608](FIGS. 894a through 917); Display Brightness Controlling Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3609] through [3618] (FIGS. 918 through 923);Multiple Party Pin-pointing Function described in paragraphs through[3666] (FIGS. 924 through 950f); Digital Camera Function described inparagraphs through [3694] (FIGS. 951 through 968); Phone Number LinkingFunction described in paragraphs [3695] through [3718] (FIGS. 968athrough 983); Multiple Window Displaying Function described inparagraphs [3719] through [3737] (FIGS. 984 through 995); Mouse PointerDisplaying Function described in paragraphs [3738] through [3775] (FIGS.996 through 1021); House Item Pin-pointing Function described inparagraphs [3776] through [3935] (FIGS. 1022 through 1152); MembershipAdministrating Function described in paragraphs [3936] through [3978](FIGS. 1153 through 1188); Keyword Search Timer Recording Functiondescribed in paragraphs [3979] through (FIGS. 1189 through 1254);Weather Forecast Displaying Function described in paragraphs through[4112] (FIGS. 1255 through 1288); Multiple Language Displaying Functiondescribed in paragraphs [4113] through [4170] (FIGS. 1289 through 1331);Caller's Information Displaying Function described in paragraphs [4171]through [4224] (FIGS. 1332 through 1375); Communication Device RemoteControlling Function (By Phone) described in paragraphs [4225] through[4265] (FIGS. 1394 through 1415); Communication Device RemoteControlling Function (By Web) described in paragraphs through [4306](FIGS. 1416 through 1437); Shortcut Icon Displaying Function describedin paragraphs [4307] through [4334] (FIGS. 1438 through 1455); Task TrayIcon Displaying Function described in paragraphs [4335] through [4357](FIGS. 1456 through 1470); Multiple Channel Processing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [4358] through [4405] (FIGS. 1471 through 1498);Solar Battery Charging Function described in paragraphs [4406] through[4419] (FIGS. 1499 through 1509); OS Updating Function described inparagraphs [4420] through [4487] (FIGS. 1510 through 1575); DeviceManaging Function described in paragraphs [4488] through [4505] (FIGS.1576 through 1587); Automobile Controlling Function described inparagraphs [4506] through [4554] (FIGS. 1588 through 1627); OCR Functiondescribed in paragraphs [4555] through [4590] (FIGS. 1628 through 1652);Real-time GPS Function described in paragraphs [4591] through [4660](FIGS. 1653 through 1712); CCD Video Stabilizing Function described inparagraphs [4661] through [4692] (FIGS. 1713 through 1736); DVD RemoteControlling Function described in paragraphs [4693] through [4731](FIGS. 1737 through 1757); Dual Frame Buffer Implementing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [4732] through (FIGS. 1758 through 1767); MousePointer Image Auto Changing Function described in paragraphs [4749]through [4762] (FIGS. 1768 through 1774); Dual CCD Camera Functiondescribed in paragraphs [4763] through [4783] (FIGS. 1775a through1786); Radio Tuner Function described in paragraphs [4784] through[4814] (FIGS. 1787 through 1812); Registered Voice Recognizing Functiondescribed in paragraphs [4815] through [4854] (FIGS. 1813 through 1842);Host's TV Resolution Converting Function described in paragraphs [4855]through [4884] (FIGS. 1843 through 1864); Voice Shortcut RecognizingFunction described in paragraphs [4885] through [4919] (FIGS. 1865through 1889); and Vital Sign Monitoring Function described inparagraphs [4920] through [5009] (FIGS. 1890a through 1954).

1. A mobile phone comprising: a mobile phone updating implementer; andan antenna; wherein said antenna receives a mobile phone updating datain a wireless fashion and said mobile phone updating implementer updatesone or more of the following: (1) a mobile phone battery controllerwhich controls the mobile phone battery included in said mobile phone,(2) a mobile phone CCD unit controller which controls the mobile phoneCCD unit included in said mobile phone, (3) a mobile phone microphonecontroller which controls the mobile phone microphone included in saidmobile phone, (4) a mobile phone speaker controller which controls themobile phone speaker included in said mobile phone, and (5) a mobilephone vibrator controller which controls the mobile phone vibratorincluded in said mobile phone.
 2. A mobile phone comprising: a voicecommunication implementer; a mobile phone updating implementer; and anantenna; wherein said voice communication implementer implements voicecommunication by sending and receiving voice data via said antenna;wherein said antenna receives a mobile phone updating data in a wirelessfashion and said mobile phone updating implementer updates one or moreof the following: (1) a mobile phone battery controller which controlsthe mobile phone battery included in said mobile phone, (2) a mobilephone CCD unit controller which controls the mobile phone CCD unitincluded in said mobile phone, (3) a mobile phone microphone controllerwhich controls the mobile phone microphone included in said mobilephone, (4) a mobile phone speaker controller which controls the mobilephone speaker included in said mobile phone, and (5) a mobile phonevibrator controller which controls the mobile phone vibrator included insaid mobile phone.
 3. A method for a mobile phone, comprising: (a)implementing voice communication by utilizing microphone and speaker;and (b) updating said mobile phone; wherein said step (b) is implementedby receiving a mobile phone updating data in a wireless fashion andupdating one or more of the following: (1) a mobile phone batterycontroller which controls the mobile phone battery included in saidmobile phone, (2) a mobile phone CCD unit controller which controls themobile phone CCD unit included in said mobile phone, (3) a mobile phonemicrophone controller which controls the mobile phone microphoneincluded in said mobile phone, (4) a mobile phone speaker controllerwhich controls the mobile phone speaker included in said mobile phone,and (5) a mobile phone vibrator controller which controls the mobilephone vibrator included in said mobile phone.
 4. The mobile phone ofclaim 1, wherein said mobile phone is a handheld voice communicationdevice which is operable to implement data communication.
 5. The mobilephone of claim 1, wherein said mobile phone is a handheld voicecommunication device which is operable to implement multiple functionssimultaneously together with voice communication.
 6. The mobile phone ofclaim 1, wherein said mobile phone battery controller, said mobile phoneCCD unit controller, said mobile phone microphone controller, saidmobile phone speaker controller, and/or said mobile phone vibratorcontroller is/are updated to the latest version by said mobile phoneupdating data.
 7. The mobile phone of claim 1, wherein two or more ofsaid mobile phone battery controller, said mobile phone CCD unitcontroller, said mobile phone microphone controller, said mobile phonespeaker controller, and said mobile phone vibrator controller areupdated simultaneously.
 8. The mobile phone of claim 1, wherein saidmobile phone updating data is received from a host computer.
 9. Themobile phone of claim 2, wherein said mobile phone is a handheld voicecommunication device which is operable to implement data communication.10. The mobile phone of claim 2, wherein said mobile phone is a handheldvoice communication device which is operable to implement multiplefunctions simultaneously together with voice communication.
 11. Themobile phone of claim 2, wherein said mobile phone battery controller,said mobile phone CCD unit controller, said mobile phone microphonecontroller, said mobile phone speaker controller, and/or said mobilephone vibrator controller is/are updated to the latest version by saidmobile phone updating data.
 12. The mobile phone of claim 2, wherein twoor more of said mobile phone battery controller, said mobile phone CCDunit controller, said mobile phone microphone controller, said mobilephone speaker controller, and said mobile phone vibrator controller areupdated simultaneously.
 13. The mobile phone of claim 2, wherein saidmobile phone updating data is received from a host computer.
 14. Themethod of claim 3, wherein said mobile phone is a handheld voicecommunication device which is operable to implement data communication.15. The method of claim 3, wherein said mobile phone is a handheld voicecommunication device which is operable to implement multiple functionssimultaneously together with voice communication.
 16. The method ofclaim 3, wherein said mobile phone battery controller, said mobile phoneCCD unit controller, said mobile phone microphone controller, saidmobile phone speaker controller, and/or said mobile phone vibratorcontroller is/are updated to the latest version by said mobile phoneupdating data.
 17. The method of claim 3, wherein two or more of saidmobile phone battery controller, said mobile phone CCD unit controller,said mobile phone microphone controller, said mobile phone speakercontroller, and said mobile phone vibrator controller are updatedsimultaneously.
 18. The method of claim 3, wherein said mobile phoneupdating data is received from a host computer.